Skip to main content

Full text of "Knights of art; stories of the Italian painters"

See other formats


•   • 


NY  PUBLIC  LBRARV     THE  BRANCH 


LIBRARIES 


3  3333  081 19  6822 


K*-, 


a 


>T~  O:\r 


THE  C 


' 


.,  N.Y.-  10019. 


c. 

2\  c-o 


KNIGHTS  OF  ART 


THE    RELEASE    OF    S.    PETER.      By    FILIPPINO    LIPPI 
"The  tall  angel  in  flowing  white  robes  gently  leads  S.  Peter  out  of  prison" 


KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

> 

STORIES  OF  THE  ITALIAN  PAINTERS 

BY    AMY    STEED  MAN 

AUTHOR  OP  '  IN  GOD'S  GARDEN* 

WITH  TWENTY-FOUR  DRAWINGS  (SIX- 
TEEN IN  COLOUR)  BY  MARY  STEEDMAN 
OF  PICTURES  BY  THE  GREAT  ARTISTS 


PHILADELPHIA 
GEORGE    W.   JACOBS   &   CO. 


,  . , 


PUBLISHERS 


. 

• ,    •  •   ' ' 
- '    -  •  -  -  - 


TO   FRANCESCA 


. 

' 


-       r     r    -       . 
'  r      , 


c    '    •    ( 

' 


ABOUT  THIS  BOOK 

WHAT  would  we  do  without  our  picture-books, 
I  wonder?  Before  we  knew  how  to  read,  before 
even  we  could  speak,  we  had  learned  to  love  them. 
We  shouted  with  pleasure  when  we  turned  the  pages 
and  saw  the  spotted  cow  standing  in  the  daisy- 
sprinkled  meadow,  the  foolish-looking  old  sheep  with 
her  gambolling  lambs,  the  wise  dog  with  his  friendly 
eyes.  They  were  all  real  friends  to  us. 

Then  a  little  later  on,  when  we  began  to  ask  for 
stories  about  the  pictures,  how  we  loved  them  more 
and  more.  There  was  the  little  girl  in  the  red  cloak 
talking  to  the  great  grey  wolf  with  the  wicked  eyes; 
the  cottage  with  the  bright  pink  roses  climbing 
round  the  lattice-window,  out  of  which  jumped  a 
little  maid  with  golden  hair,  followed  by  the  great 
big  bear,  the  middle-sized  bear,  and  the  tiny  bear. 
Truly  those  stories  were  a  great  joy  to  us,  but  we 
would  never  have  loved  them  quite  so  much  if  we 
had  not  known  their  pictured  faces  as  well. 

Do  you  ever  wonder  how  all  these  pictures  came 
to  be  made  ?  They  had  a  beginning,  just  as  every- 
thing else  had,  but  the  beginning  goes  so  far  back 
that  we  can  scarcely  trace  it. 

Children  have  not  always  had  picture-books  to 
look  at.  In  the  long-ago  days  such  things  were  not 


viii  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

known.  Thousands  of  years  ago,  far  away  in 
Assyria,  the  Assyrian  people  learned  to  make 
pictures  and  to  carve  them  out  in  stone.  In  Egypt, 
too,  the  Egyptians  traced  pictures  upon  the  walls 
of  their  temples  and  upon  the  painted  mummy- 
cases  of  the  dead.  Then  the  Greeks  made  still 
more  beautiful  statues  and  pictures  in  marble,  and 
called  them  gods  and  goddesses,  for  all  this  was  at 
a  time  when  the  true  God  was  forgotten. 

Afterwards,  when  Christ  had  come  and  the  people 
had  learned  that  the  pictured  gods  were  not  real, 
they  began  to  think  it  wicked  to  make  beautiful 
pictures  or  carve  marble  statues.  The  few  pictures 
that  were  made  were  stiff  and  ugly,  the  figures  were 
not  like  real  men  and  women,  the  animals  and  trees 
were  very  strange-looking  things.  And  instead  of 
making  the  sky  blue  as  it  really  was,  they  made  it 
a  chequered  pattern  of  gold.  After  a  time  it  seemed 
as  if  the  art  of  making  pictures  was  going  to  die  out 
altogether. 

Then  came  the  time  which  is  called  '  The  Renaiss- 
ance,' a  word  which  means  being  born  again,  or  a 
new  awakening,  when  men  began  to  draw  real 
pictures  of  real  things  and  fill  the  world  with  images 
of  beauty. 

Now  it  is  the  stories  of  the  men  of  that  time,  who 
put  new  life  into  Art,  that  I  am  going  to  tell  you — 
men  who  learned,  step  by  step,  to  paint  the  most 
beautiful  pictures  that  the  world  possesses. 

In  telling  these  stories  I  have  been  helped  by  an 
old  book  called  The  Lives  of  the  Painters,  by 
Giorgio  Vasari,  who  was  himself  a  painter.  He 


ABOUT  THIS  BOOK  ix 

took  great  delight  in  gathering  together  all  the 
stories  about  these  artists  and  writing  them  down 
with  loving  care,  so  that  he  shows  us  real  living 
men,  and  not  merely  great  names  by  which  the 
famous  pictures  are  known. 

It  did  not  make  much  difference  to  us  when  we 
were  little  children  whether  our  pictures  were  good 
or  bad,  as  long  as  the  colours  were  bright  and  we 
knew  what  they  meant.  But  as  we  grow  older  and 
wiser  our  eyes  grow  wiser  too,  and  we  learn  to  know 
what  is  good  and  what  is  poor.  Only,  just  as  our 
tongues  must  be  trained  to  speak,  our  hands  to 
work,  and  our  ears  to  love  good  music,  so  our  eyes 
must  be  taught  to  see  what  is  beautiful,  or  we  may 
perhaps  pass  it  carelessly  by,  and  lose  a  great  joy 
which  might  be  ours. 

So  now  if  you  learn  something  about  these  great 
artists  and  their  wonderful  pictures,  it  will  help  your 
eyes  to  grow  wise.  And  some  day  should  you  visit 
sunny  Italy,  where  these  men  lived  and  worked, 
you  will  feel  that  they  are  quite  old  friends.  Their 
pictures  will  not  only  be  a  delight  to  your  eyes,  but 
will  teach  your  heart  something  deeper  and  more 
wonderful  than  any  words  can  explain. 

AMY  STEEDMAN. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

GIOTTO,       ....  BORN  1276,  DIKD  1337,  .         .          1 

FRA  ANGELICO,        .        .  „     1387,     „  1455,  . 

MASACCIO,          ...  „     1401,     „  1428,  . 

FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI,          .  „     1412,     „  1469,  . 

SANDRO  BOTTICELLI,      .  „     1446,      „  1510,  . 

DOMENICO  GHIRLANDAIO,  „     1449,     „  1494,  . 

FILIPPINO  LIPPI,      .        .  „     1457,     „  1504,  . 

PIETRO  PERUGINO,          .  „     1446,     „  1524,  . 

LEONARDO  DA  VINCI,     .  „     1452,      „  1519,  . 

RAPHAEL,  ....  „     1483,      „  1520,  . 

MICHELANGELO,       .        .  „      1475,     „  1564,  . 

ANDREA  DEL  SARTO,      .  „     1487,      „  1531,  . 

GIOVANNI  BELLINI,         .  „     1426,      „  1516,  . 

VITTORE  CARPACCIO,     .  „     1470?     „  1519,  . 

GIORGIONE,        ...  „     1477?    „  1510,  . 

TITIAN,       ....  „     1477,     „  1576,  . 


TINTORETTO,     ...  „      1562,      „      1637,  . 

PAUL  VERONESE,     .        ,  „      1528,      „      1588,  . 


13 
20 
24 
52 
63 
72 
78 
94 
113 
121 
131 
142 
149 
154 
161 
165 
172 


LIST    OF    PICTURES 


IN  COLOUR 

THE  RELEASE  OF  ST.  PETER.     BY  FILIPPO  LIPPI, 

'The  tall  angel  in  flowing  white  robes  gently  leads  St.  Peter 

out  of  prison/    .....      Frontispiece 

Church  of  the  Carmine,  Florence. 

TO  FACE  PAGE 

THE  VISIT  OF  THE  MAGI.     BY  GIOTTO, 

'  The  little  Baby  Jesus  sitting  on  His  Mother's  knee/         .          8 
Academia,  Florence. 

THE  MEETING  OF  ANNA  AND  JOACHIM.    BY  GIOTTO, 

( Two  homely  figures  outside  the  narrow  gateway,'  .         10 

Sta.  Maria  Novella,  Florence. 

THE  ANNUNCIATION.     BY  FRA  ANGELICO, 

{ The  gentle  Virgin  bending  before  the  Angel  messenger,'          14 
S.  Marco,  Florence. 

THE  FLIGHT  INTO  EGYPT.     BY  FRA  ANGELICO, 

'The  Madonna  in  her  robe  of  purest  blue  holding  the  Baby 

close  in  her  arms,'  .  .  .  .  .18 

Academia,  Florence. 

THE  ANNUNCIATION.     BY  FILIPPO  LIPPI, 

'  The  Madonna  with  the  dove  fluttering  near,  and  the  Angel 

messenger  bearing  the  lily  branch,'      .  .  .42 

Academia,  Florence. 

xiil 


xiv  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

TO  FACE  PAGE 

THE  NATIVITY.     BY  FILIPPO  LIPPI, 

'  His  Madonnas  grew  ever  more  beautiful/ .  .  .48 

Academia,  Florence. 

THE  ANGEL.     BY  BOTTICELLI, 

TOBIAS  AND  THE  ANGEL. 

'His  figures  seemed  to  move  as  if  to  the  rhythm  of  music,'         64 
Academia,  Florence. 

ST.  PETER  IN  PRISON.     BY  FILIPPO  LIPPI, 

'The  sad  face  of  St.  Peter  looks  out  through  the  prison  bars,'        74 
Church  of  the  Carmine,  Florence. 

TWO  SAINTS.     BY  PERUGINO, 

THE  FRESCO  OF  THE  CRUCIFIXION. 

'  Beyond  was  the  blue  thread  of  river  and  the  single  trees 

pointing  upwards,'          .  .  ...  .86 

Sta.  Maddalena  de  Pazzi,  Florence. 

TWO  SAINTS.     BY  PERUGINO, 

THE  FRESCO  OF  THE  CRUCIFIXION. 

'  Quiet  dignified  saints  and  spacious  landscapes/     ,  .        90 

Sta.  Maddalena  de  Pazzi,  Florence. 

ST.  JAMES.     BY  ANDREA  DEL  SARTO. 

'The  kind  strong  hand  of  the  saint  is  placed  lovingly 

beneath  the  little  chin/  ....       140 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 

CHERUB.     BY  GIOV.  BELLINI, 

'  Giovanni's  angels  are  little  human  boys  with  grave  sweet 

faces/      .......       148 

Church  of  the  Frari,  Venice. 

ST.  TRYPHONIUS  AND  THE  BASILISK.     BY  CARPACCIO, 

'  The  little  boy  saint  has  folded  his  hands  together  and  looks 

upward  in  prayer/          .....       162 

S.  Giorgio  Schiavari,  Venice. 


LIST  OF  PICTURES  xv 

TO  PACK  PAGE 

THE  LITTLE  VIRGIN.     BY  TITIAN, 

'  The  little  maid  is  all  alone/  .  .  .  .164 

Academia,  Venice. 

THE  LITTLE  ST.  JOHN.     BY  VERONESE, 

THE  MADONNA  ENTHRONED. 

'The  little  St.  John  with  the  skin  thrown  over  his  bare 

shoulder  and  the  cross  in  his  hand,'      .  .  .174 

Academia,  Florence, 


IN  BLACK  AND  WHITE 

RELIEF  IN  MARBLE  BY  GIOTTO, 

'The  shepherd  sitting  under  his  tent,  with  the  sheep  in 

front,'     .......  6 

Campanile,  Florence. 

DRAWING  BY  MASACCIO, 

'His  models  were  ordinary  Florentine  youths,'      .  .        22 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 

DRAWING  BY  GHIRLANDAIO, 

'  The  men  of  the  market-place,'        .  .  •  .66 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 

DRAWING  BY  LEONARDO  DA  VINCI, 

'  He  loved  to  draw  strange  monsters,'          .  •  »       104 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 

DRAWING  BY  RAPHAEL, 

'Round-limbed  rosy  children,  half  human,  half  divine,'    .       114 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 

DRAWING  BY  MICHELANGELO, 

'  A  terrible  head  of  a  furious  old  man,'         .  •  « 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 


xvi  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

TO  FACE  PAGE 

DRAWING  BY  GIORGIONE, 

CA  man  in  Venetian  dress  helping  two  women  to  mount  one 

of  the  niches  of  a  marble  palace,'  .  .  .       156 

Uffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 

DRAWING  BY  TINTORETTO, 

'  The  head  of  a  Venetian  boy,  such  as  Tintoretto  met  daily 

among  the  fisher-folk  of  Venice/          »  »  .       168 

Vffizi  Gallery,  Florence. 


GIOTTO 

IT  was  more  than  six  hundred  years  ago  that  a  little 
peasant  baby  was  born  in  the  small  village  of  Ves- 
pignano,  not  far  from  the  beautiful  city  of  Florence, 
in  Italy.  The  baby's  father,  an  honest,  hard-work- 
ing countryman,  was  called  Bondone,  and  the  name 
he  gave  to  his  little  son  was  Giotto. 

Life  was  rough  and  hard  in  that  country  home, 
but  the  peasant  baby  grew  into  a  strong,  hardy  boy, 
learning  early  what  cold  and  hunger  meant.  The 
hills  which  surrounded  the  village  were  grey  and 
bare,  save  where  the  silver  of  the  olive-trees  shone 
in  the  sunlight,  or  the  tender  green  of  the  shooting 
corn  made  the  valley  beautiful  in  early  spring.  In 
summer  there  was  little  shade  from  the  blazing  sun 
as  it  rode  high  in  the  blue  sky,  and  the  grass  which 
grew  among  the  grey  rocks  was  often  burnt  and 
brown.  But,  nevertheless,  it  was  here  that  the 
sheep  of  the  village  would  be  turned  out  to  find 
what  food  they  could,  tended  and  watched  by  one 
of  the  village  boys. 

So  it  happened  that  when  Giotto  was  ten  years 
old  his  father  sent  him  to  take  care  of  the  sheep 
upon  the  hillside.  Country  boys  had  then  no 
schools  to  go  to  or  lessons  to  learn,  and  Giotto  spent 
long  happy  days,  in  sunshine  and  rain,  as  he  followed 

A 


2  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  sheep  from  place  to  place,  wherever  they  could 
find  grass  enough  to  feed  on.  But  Giotto  did  some- 
thing else  besides  watching  his  sheep.  Indeed,  he 
sometimes  forgot  all  about  them,  and  many  a  search 
he  had  to  gather  them  all  together  again.  For 
there  was  one  thing  he  loved  doing  better  than 
all  beside,  and  that  was  to  try  to  draw  pictures  of 
all  the  things  he  saw  around  him. 

It  was  no  easy  matter  for  the  little  shepherd  lad. 
He  had  no  pencils  or  paper,  and  he  had  never,  per- 
haps, seen  a  picture  in  all  his  life.  But  all  this 
mattered  little  to  him.  Out  there,  under  the  blue 
sky,  his  eyes  made  pictures  for  him  out  of  the  fleecy 
white  clouds  as  they  slowly  changed  from  one  form 
to  another.  He  learned  to  know  exactly  the  shape 
of  every  flower  and  how  it  grew ;  he  noticed  how 
the  olive-trees  laid  their  silver  leaves  against  the 
blue  background  of  the  sky  that  peeped  in  between, 
and  how  his  sheep  looked  as  they  stooped  to  eat,  or 
lay  down  in  the  shadow  of  a  rock. 

Nothing  escaped  his  keen,  watchful  eyes,  and  then 
with  eager  hands  he  would  sharpen  a  piece  of  stone, 
choose  out  the  smoothest  rock,  and  try  to  draw  on 
its  flat  surface  all  those  wonderful  shapes  which  had 
filled  his  eyes  with  their  beauty.  Olive-trees,  flowers, 
birds  and  beasts  were  there,  but  especially  his  sheep, 
for  they  were  his  friends  and  companions  who  were 
always  near  him,  and  he  could  draw  them  in  a 
different  way  each  time  they  moved. 

Now  it  fell  out  that  one  day  a  great  master  painter 
from  Florence  came  riding  through  the  valley  and 
over  the  hills  where  Giotto  was  feeding  his  sheep. 


GIOTTO  3 

The  name  of  the  great  master  was  Cimabue,  and  he 
was  the  most  wonderful  artist  in  the  world,  so  men 
said.  He  had  painted  a  picture  which  had  made  all 
Florence  rejoice.  The  Florentines  had  never  seen 
anything  like  it  before,  and  yet  it  was  but  a  strange- 
looking  portrait  of  the  Madonna  and  Child,  scarcely 
like  a  real  woman  or  a  real  baby  at  all.  Still,  it 
seemed  to  them  a  perfect  wonder,  and  Cimabue  was 
honoured  as  one  of  the  city's  greatest  men. 

The  road  was  lonely  as  it  wound  along.  There 
was  nothing  to  be  seen  but  waves  of  grey  hills  on 
every  side,  so  the  stranger  rode  on,  scarcely  lifting 
his  eyes  as  he  went.  Then  suddenly  he  came  upon 
a  flock  of  sheep  nibbling  the  scanty  sunburnt  grass, 
and  a  little  brown-faced  shepherd-boy  gave  him  a 
cheerful  '  Good-day,  master.' 

There  was  something  so  bright  and  merry  in  the 
boy's  smile  that  the  great  man  stopped  and  began  to 
talk  to  him.  Then  his  eye  fell  upon  the  smooth  flat 
rock  over  which  the  boy  had  been  bending,  and  he 
started  with  surprise. 

'  Who  did  that  ? '  he  asked  quickly,  and  he  pointed 
to  the  outline  of  a  sheep  scratched  upon  the  stone. 

'  It  is  the  picture  of  one  of  my  sheep  there,' 
answered  the  boy,  hanging  his  head  with  a  shame- 
faced look.  '  I  drew  it  with  this,'  and  he  held  out 
towards  the  stranger  the  sharp  stone  he  had  been 
using. 

'  Who  taught  you  to  do  this  ? '  asked  the  master 
as  he  looked  more  carefully  at  the  lines  drawn  on 
the  rock. 

The  boy  opened  his  eyes  wide  with  astonishment 


4  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

'  Nobody  taught  me,  master,'  he  said.  '  I  only  try 
to  draw  the  things  that  my  eyes  see.' 

'  How  would  you  like  to  come  with  me  to  Florence 
and  learn  to  be  a  painter  ? '  asked  Cimabue,  for  he 
saw  that  the  boy  had  a  wonderful  power  in  his  little 
rough  hands. 

Giotto's  cheeks  flushed,  and  his  eyes  shone  with 

joy- 

*  Indeed,  master,  I  would  come  most  willingly,' 
he  cried,  '  if  only  my  father  will  allow  it.' 

So  back  they  went  together  to  the  village,  but  not 
before  Giotto  had  carefully  put  his  sheep  into  the 
fold,  for  he  was  never  one  to  leave  his  work  half 
done. 

Bondone  was  amazed  to  see  his  boy  in  company 
with  such  a  grand  stranger,  but  he  was  still  more 
surprised  when  he  heard  of  the  stranger's  offer.  It 
seemed  a  golden  chance,  and  he  gladly  gave  his 
consent. 

Why,  of  course,  the  boy  should  go  to  Florence  if 
the  gracious  master  would  take  him  and  teach  him 
to  become  a  painter.  The  home  would  be  lonely 
without  the  boy  who  was  so  full  of  fun  and  as  bright 
as  a  sunbeam.  But  such  chances  were  not  to  be  met 
with  every  day,  and  he  was  more  than  willing  to  let 
him  go. 

So  the  master  set  out,  and  the  boy  Giotto  went 
with  him  to  Florence  to  begin  his  training. 

The  studio  where  Cimabue  worked  was  not  at 
all  like  those  artists'  rooms  which  we  now  call 
studios.  It  was  much  more  like  a  workshop,  and 
the  boys  who  went  there  to  learn  how  to  draw  and 


GIOTTO  5 

paint  were  taught  first  how  to  grind  and  prepare 
the  colours  and  then  to  mix  them.  They  were  not 
allowed  to  touch  a  brush  or  pencil  for  a  long  time, 
but  only  to  watch  their  master  at  work,  and  learn 
all  that  they  could  from  what  they  saw  him  do. 

So  there  the  boy  Giotto  worked  and  watched,  but 
when  his  turn  came  to  use  the  brush,  to  the  amaze- 
ment of  all,  his  pictures  were  quite  unlike  anything 
which  had  ever  been  painted  before  in  the  work- 
shop. Instead  of  copying  the  stiff,  unreal  figures, 
he  drew  real  people,  real  animals,  and  all  the 
things  which  he  had  learned  to  know  so  well  on 
the  grey  hillside,  when  he  watched  his  father's 
sheep.  Other  artists  had  painted  the  Madonna  and 
Infant  Christ,  but  Giotto  painted  a  mother  and  a 
baby. 

And  before  long  this  worked  such  a  wonderful 
change  that  it  seemed  indeed  as  if  the  art  of  making 
pictures  had  been  born  again.  To  us  his  work  still 
looks  stiff  and  strange,  but  in  it  was  the  beginning 
of  all  the  beautiful  pictures  that  belong  to  us  now. 

Giotto  did  not  only  paint  pictures,  he  worked  in 
marble  as  well.  To-day,  if  you  walk  through 
Florence,  the  City  of  Flowers,  you  will  still  see  its 
fairest  flower  of  all,  the  tall  white  campanile  or  bell- 
tower,  '  Giotto's  tower  '  as  it  is  called.  There  it 
stands  in  all  its  grace  and  loveliness  like  a  tall  white 
lily  against  the  blue  sky,  pointing  ever  upward,  in 
the  grand  old  faith  of  the  shepherd-boy.  Day  after 
day  it  calls  to  prayer  and  to  good  works,  as  *it  has 
done  all  these  hundreds  of  years  since  Giotto 
designed  and  helped  to  build  it. 


6  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Some  people  call  his  pictures  stiff  and  ugly,  for 
not  every  one  has  wise  eyes  to  see  their  beauty,  but 
the  loveliness  of  this  tower  can  easily  be  seen  by  all. 
There  the  white  doves  circle  round  and  round,  and 
rest  in  the  sheltering  niches  of  the  delicately  carved 
arches ;  there  at  the  call  of  its  bell  the  black-robed 
Brothers  of  Pity  hurry  past  to  their  works  of  mercy. 
There  too  the  little  children  play,  and  sometimes 
stop  to  stare  at  the  marble  pictures,  set  in  the  first 
story  of  the  tower,  low  enough  to  be  seen  from 
the  street.  Their  special  favourite  is  perhaps  the 
picture  of  the  shepherd  sitting  under  his  tent,  with 
the  sheep  in  front,  and  with  the  funniest  little  dog 
keeping  watch  at  the  side. 

Giotto  always  had  a  great  love  for  animals,  and 
whenever  it  was  possible  he  would  squeeze  one  into 
a  corner  of  his  pictures.  He  was  sixty  years  old 
when  he  designed  this  wonderful  tower  and  cut 
some  of  the  marble  pictures  with  his  own  hand, 
but  you  can  see  that  the  memory  of  those  old  days 
when  he  ran  barefoot  about  the  hills  and  tended  his 
sheep  was  with  him  still.  Just  such  another  little 
puppy  must  have  often  played  with  him  in  those 
long-ago  days  before  he  became  a  great  painter  and 
was  still  only  a  merry,  brown-faced  boy,  making 
pictures  with  a  sharp  stone  upon  the  smooth  rocks. 

Up  and  down  the  narrow  streets  of  Florence  now, 
the  great  painter  would  walk  and  watch  the  faces 
of  the  people  as  they  passed.  And  his  eyes  would 
still  make  pictures  of  them  and  their  busy  life,  just 
as  they  used  to  do  with  the  olive-trees,  the  sheep, 
and  the  clouds. 


Relief  in  marble  by  GIOTTO 
"  The  shepherd  sitting  ui 


GIOTTO  7 

In  those  days  nobody  cared  to  have  pictures  in 
their  houses,  and  only  the  walls  of  the  churches 
were  painted.  So  the  pictures,  or  frescoes,  as  they 
were  called,  were  of  course  all  about  sacred  subjects, 
either  stories  out  of  the  Bible  or  of  the  lives  of  the 
saints.  And  as  there  were  few  books,  and  the  poor 
people  did  not  know  how  to  read,  these  frescoed 
walls  were  the  only  story-books  they  had. 

What  a  joy  those  pictures  of  Giotto's  must  have 
been,  then,  to  those  poor  folk  !  They  looked  at  the 
little  Baby  Jesus  sitting  on  His  mother's  knee, 
wrapped  in  swaddling  bands,  just  like  one  of  their 
own  little  ones,  and  it  made  Him  seem  a  very  real 
baby.  The  wise  men  who  talked  together  and 
pointed  to  the  shining  star  overhead  looked  just 
like  any  of  the  great  nobles  of  Florence.  And 
there  at  the  back  were  the  two  horses  looking  on 
with  wise  interested  eyes,  just  as  any  of  their  own 
horses  might  have  done. 

It  seemed  to  make  the  story  of  Christmas  a  thing 
which  had  really  happened,  instead  of  a  far-away 
tale  which  had  little  meaning  for  them.  Heaven 
and  the  Madonna  were  not  so  far  off  after  all.  And 
it  comforted  them  to  think  that  the  Madonna  had 
been  a  real  woman  like  themselves,  and  that  the 
Jesu  Bambino  would  stoop  to  bless  them  still,  just 
as  He  leaned  forward  to  bless  the  wise  men  in  the 
picture. 

How  real  too  would  seem  the  old  story  of  the 
meeting  of  Anna  and  Joachim  at  the  Golden  Gate, 
when  they  could  gaze  upon  the  two  homely  figures 
under  the  narrow  gateway.  No  visionary  saints 


8  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

these,  but  just  a  simple  husband  and  wife,  meeting 
each  other  with  joy  after  a  sad  separation,  and  yet 
with  the  touch  of  heavenly  meaning  shown  by  the 
angel  who  hovers  above  and  places  a  hand  upon 
each  head. 

It  was  not  only  in  Florence  that  Giotto  did  his 
work.  His  fame  spread  far  and  wide,  and  he  went 
from  town  to  town  eagerly  welcomed  by  all.  We 
can  trace  his  footsteps  as  he  went,  by  those  won- 
derful old  pictures  which  he  spread  with  loving  care 
over  the  bare  walls  of  the  churches,  lifting,  as  it 
were,  the  curtain  that  hides  Heaven  from  our  view 
and  bringing  some  of  its  joys  to  earth. 

Then,  at  Assisi,  he  covered  the  walls  and  ceiling 
of  the  church  with  the  wonderful  frescoes  of  the 
life  of  St.  Francis  ;  and  the  little  round  common- 
place Arena  Chapel  of  Padua  is  made  exquisite 
inside  by  his  pictures  of  the  life  of  our  Lord. 

In  the  days  when  Giotto  lived  the  towns  of  Italy 
were  continually  quarrelling  with  one  another,  and 
there  was  always  fighting  going  on  somewhere. 
The  cities  were  built  with  a  wall  all  round  them, 
and  the  gates  were  shut  each  night  to  keep  out 
their  enemies.  But  often  the  fighting  was  between 
different  families  inside  the  city,  and  the  grim  old 
palaces  in  the  narrow  streets  were  built  tall  and 
strong  that  they  might  be  the  more  easily  defended. 

In  the  midst  of  all  this  war  and  quarrelling  Giotto 
lived  his  quiet,  peaceful  life,  the  friend  of  every  one 
and  the  enemy  of  none.  Rival  towns  sent  for  him 
to  paint  their  churches  with  his  heavenly  pictures, 
and  the  people  who  hated  Florence  forgot  that  he 


THE    VISIT   OF    THE    MAGI.      By    GIOTTO 
'  The  little  Baby  Jesus  sitting  on  His  Mother's  knee  " 


GIOTTO  9 

was  a  Florentine.  He  was  just  Giotto,  and  he 
belonged  to  them  all.  His  brush  was  the  white  flag  of 
truce  which  made  men  forget  their  strife  and  angry 
passions,  and  turned  their  thoughts  to  holier  things. 

Even  the  great  poet  Dante  did  not  scorn  to  be  a 
friend  of  the  peasant  painter,  and  we  still  have  the 
portrait  which  Giotto  painted  of  him  in  an  old  fresco 
at  Florence.  Later  on,  when  the  great  poet  was  a 
poor  unhappy  exile,  Giotto  met  him  again  at  Padua 
and  helped  to  cheer  some  of  those  sad  grey  days, 
made  so  bitter  by  strife  and  injustice. 

Now  when  Giotto  was  beginning  to  grow  famous, 
it  happened  that  the  Pope  was  anxious  to  have  the 
walls  of  the  great  Cathedral  of  St.  Peter  at  Rome 
decorated.  So  he  sent  messengers  all  over  Italy  to 
find  out  who  were  the  best  painters,  that  he  might 
invite  them  to  come  and  do  the  work. 

The  messengers  went  from  town  to  town  and 
asked  every  artist  for  a  specimen  of  his  painting. 
This  was  gladly  given,  for  it  was  counted  a  great 
honour  to  help  to  make  St.  Peter's  beautiful. 

By  and  by  the  messengers  came  to  Giotto  and 
told  him  their  errand.  The  Pope,  they  said,  wished 
to  see  one  of  his  drawings  to  judge  if  he  was  fit  for 
the  great  work.  Giotto,  who  was  always  most 
courteous,  '  took  a  sheet  of  paper  and  a  pencil 
dipped  in  a  red  colour,  then,  resting  his  elbow  on 
his  side,  with  one  turn  of  the  hand,  he  drew  a  circle 
so  perfect  and  exact  that  it  was  a  marvel  to  behold.' 
'  Here  is  your  drawing,'  he  said  to  the  messenger, 
with  a  smile,  handing  him  the  drawing. 

*  Am  I  to  have  nothing  more  than  this  ? '  asked 


10  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  man,  staring  at  the  red  circle  in  astonishment 
and  disgust. 

'  That  is  enough  and  to  spare,'  answered  Giotto. 
'  Send  it  with  the  rest.' 

The  messengers  thought  this  must  all  be  a  joke. 

'  How  foolish  we  shall  look  if  we  take  only  a 
round  O  to  show  his  Holiness,'  they  said. 

But  they  could  get  nothing  else  from  Giotto,  so 
they  were  obliged  to  be  content  and  to  send  it  with 
the  other  drawings,  taking  care  to  explain  just  how 
it  was  done. 

The  Pope  and  his  advisers  looked  carefully  over 
all  the  drawings,  and,  when  they  came  to  that  round 
O,  they  knew  that  only  a  master-hand  could  have 
made  such  a  perfect  circle  without  the  help  of  a 
compass.  Without  a  moment's  hesitation  they 
decided  that  Giotto  was  the  man  they  wanted,  and 
they  at  once  invited  him  to  come  to  Rome  to 
decorate  the  cathedral  walls.  So  when  the  story 
was  known  the  people  became  prouder  than  ever  of 
their  great  painter,  and  the  round  O  of  Giotto  has 
become  a  proverb  to  this  day  in  Tuscany. 

'  Round  as  the  O  of  Giotto,  d'  ye  see  ; 
Which  means  as  well  done  as  a  thing  can  be.' 

Later  on,  when  Giotto  was  at  Naples,  he  was  paint- 
ing in  the  palace  chapel  one  very  hot  day,  when  the 
king  came  in  to  watch  him  at  his  work.  It  really 
was  almost  too  hot  to  move,  and  yet  Giotto  painted 
away  busily. 

*  Giotto,'  said  the  king,  « if  I  were  in  thy  place  I 
would  give  up  painting  for  a  while  and  take  my 
rest,  now  that  it  is  so  hot.' 


•  r 


GIOTTO  11 

'And,  indeed,  so  I  would  most  certainly  do,' 
answered  Giotto,  'if  I  were  in  your  place,  your 
Majesty.' 

It  was  these  quick  answers  and  his  merry  smile 
that  charmed  every  one,  and  made  the  painter  a 
favourite  with  rich  and  poor  alike. 

There  are  a  great  many  stories  told  of  him,  and  they 
all  show  what  a  sunny-tempered,  kindly  man  he  was. 

It  is  said  that  one  day  he  was  standing  in  one  of 
the  narrow  streets  of  Florence  talking  very  earnestly 
to  a  friend,  when  a  pig  came  running  down  the  road 
in  a  great  hurry.  It  did  not  stop  to  look  where  it 
was  going,  but  ran  right  between  the  painter's  legs 
and  knocked  him  flat  on  his  back,  putting  an  end  to 
his  learned  talk. 

Giotto  scrambled  to  his  feet  with  a  rueful  smile, 
and  shook  his  ringer  at  the  pig  which  was  fast  dis- 
appearing in  the  distance. 

*  Ah,  well  1 '  he  said,  *  I  suppose  thou  hadst  as 
much  right  to  the  road  as  I  had.  Besides,  how 
many  gold  pieces  I  have  earned  by  the  help  of  thy 
bristles,  and  never  have  I  given  any  of  thy  family 
even  a  drop  of  soup  in  payment.' 

Another  time  he  went  riding  with  a  very  learned 
lawyer  into  the  country  to  look  after  his  property. 
For  when  Bondone  died,  he  left  all  his  fields  and  his 
farm  to  his  painter  son.  Very  soon  a  storm  came  on, 
and  the  rain  poured  down  as  if  it  never  meant  to  stop. 

'  Let  us  seek  shelter  in  this  farmhouse  and  borrow 
a  cloak,'  suggested  Giotto. 

So  they  went  in  and  borrowed  two  old  cloaks 
from  the  farmer,  and  wrapped  themselves  up  from 


12  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

head  to  foot.  Then  they  mounted  their  horses  and 
rode  back  together  to  Florence. 

Presently  the  lawyer  turned  to  look  at  Giotto,  and 
immediately  burst  into  a  loud  laugh.  The  rain  was 
running  from  the  painter's  cap,  he  was  splashed  with 
mud,  and  the  old  cloak  made  him  look  like  a  very 
forlorn  beggar. 

'  Dost  think  if  any  one  met  thee  now,  they  would 
believe  that  thou  art  the  best  painter  in  the 
world  ? '  laughed  the  lawyer. 

Giotto's  eyes  twinkled  as  he  looked  at  the  funny 
figure  riding  beside  him,  for  the  lawyer  was  very 
small,  and  had  a  crooked  back,  and  rolled  up  in  the 
old  cloak  he  looked  like  a  bundle  of  rags. 

*  Yes  ! '  he  answered  quickly,  '  any  one  would 
certainly  believe  I  was  a  great  painter,  if  he  could 
but  first  persuade  himself  that  thou  dost  know 
thy  A  B  C.' 

In  all  these  stories  we  catch  glimpses  of  the  good- 
natured  kindly  painter,  with  his  love  of  jokes,  and 
his  own  ready  answers,  and  all  the  time  we  must 
remember  that  he  was  filling  the  world  with  beauty, 
which  it  still  treasures  to-day,  helping  to  sow  the 
seeds  of  that  great  tree  of  Art  which  was  to  blossom 
so  gloriously  in  later  years. 

And  when  he  had  finished  his  earthly  work  it 
was  in  his  own  cathedral,  '  St.  Mary  of  the  Flowers,' 
that  they  laid  him  to  rest,  while  the  people  mourned 
him  as  a  good  friend  as  well  as  a  great  painter. 
There  he  lies  in  the  shadow  of  his  lily  tower,  whose 
slender  grace  and  delicate-tinted  marbles  keep  his 
memory  ever  fresh  in  his  beautiful  city  of  Florence. 


FRA  ANGELICO 

NEARLY  a  hundred  years  had  passed  by  since  Giotto 
lived  and  worked  in  Florence,  and  in  the  same  hilly 
country  where  he  used  to  tend  his  sheep  another 
great  painter  was  born. 

Many  other  artists  had  come  and  gone,  and  had 
added  their  golden  links  of  beauty  to  the  chain  of 
Art  which  bound  these  years  together.  Some  day 
you  will  learn  to  know  all  their  names  and  what 
they  did.  But  now  we  will  only  single  out,  here 
and  there,  a  few  of  those  names  which  are  perhaps 
greater  than  the  rest.  Just  as  on  a  clear  night, 
when  we  look  up  into  the  starlit  sky,  it  would 
bewilder  us  to  try  and  remember  all  the  stars,  so 
we  learn  first  to  know  those  that  are  most  easily 
recognised — the  Plough,  or  the  Great  Bear,  as  they 
shine  with  a  clear  steady  light  against  the  back- 
ground of  a  thousand  lesser  stars. 

The  name  by  which  this  second  great  painter  is 
known  is  Fra  Angelico,  but  that  was  only  the  name 
he  earned  in  later  years.  His  baby  name  was 
Guido,  and  his  home  was  in  a  village  close  to  where 
Giotto  was  born. 

He  was  not  a  poor  boy,  and  did  not  need  to 
work  in  the  fields  or  tend  the  sheep  on  the  hillside. 
Indeed,  he  might  have  soon  become  rich  and 


13 


14  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

famous,  for  his  wonderful  talent  for  painting  would 
have  quickly  brought  him  honours  and  wealth  if  he 
had  gone  out  into  the  world.  But  instead  of  this, 
when  he  was  a  young  man  of  twenty  he  made  up 
his  mind  to  enter  the  convent  at  Fiesole,  and  to 
become  a  monk  of  the  Order  of  Saint  Dominic. 

Every  brother,  or  frate,  as  he  is  called,  who  leaves 
the  world  and  enters  the  life  of  the  convent  is  given 
a  new  name,  and  his  old  name  is  never  used  again. 
So  young  Guido  was  called  Fra  Giovanni,  or 
Brother  John.  But  it  is  not  by  that  name  that 
he  is  known  best,  but  that  of  Fra  Angelico,  or  the 
angelic  brother — a  name  which  was  given  him  after- 
wards because  of  his  pure  and  beautiful  life,  and  the 
heavenly  pictures  which  he  painted. 

With  all  his  great  gifts  in  his  hands,  with  all  the 
years  of  youth  and  pleasure  stretching  out  green 
and  fair  before  him,  he  said  good-bye  to  earthly 
joys,  and  chose  rather  to  serve  his  Master  Christ  in 
the  way  he  thought  was  right. 

The  monks  of  St.  Dominic  were  the  great 
preachers  of  those  days — men  who  tried  to  make 
the  world  better  by  telling  people  what  they  ought 
to  do,  and  teaching  them  how  to  live  honest  and 
good  lives.  But  there  are  other  ways  of  teaching 
people  besides  preaching,  and  the  young  monk  who 
spent  his  time  bending  over  the  illuminated  prayer- 
book,  seeing  with  his  dreamy  eyes  visions  of  saints 
and  white-robed  angels,  was  preparing  to  be  a 
greater  teacher  than  them  all.  The  words  of  the 
preacher  monks  have  passed  away,  and  the  world 
pays  little  heed  to  them  now,  but  the  teaching  of 


THE    ANNUNCIATION.      By    FRA    ANGELICO 
'The  grentle  Virgin  bending  before  the  Angel  messenger'' 


L.  I 


FRA  ANGELICO  15 

Fra  Angelico,  the  silent  lessons  of  his  wonderful 
pictures,  are  as  fresh  and  clear  to-day  as  they  were 
in  those  far-off  years. 

Great  trouble  was  in  store  for  the  monks  of 
the  little  convent  at  Fiesole,  which  Fra  Angelico 
and  his  brother  Benedetto  had  entered.  Fierce 
struggles  were  going  on  in  Italy  between  different 
religious  parties,  and  at  one  time  the  little  band 
of  preaching  monks  were  obliged  to  leave  their 
peaceful  home  at  Fiesole  to  seek  shelter  in  other 
towns.  But,  as  it  turned  out,  this  was  good  fortune 
for  the  young  painter-monk,  for  in  those  hill  towns 
of  Umbria  where  the  brothers  sought  refuge  there 
were  pictures  to  be  studied  which  delighted  his 
eyes  with  their  beauty,  and  taught  him  many  a 
lesson  which  he  could  never  have  learned  on  the 
quiet  slopes  of  Fiesole. 

The  hill  towns  of  Italy  are  very  much  the  same 
to-day  as  they  were  in  those  days.  Long  winding 
roads  lead  upwards  from  the  plain  below  to  the 
city  gates,  and  there  on  the  summit  of  the  hill  the 
little  town  is  built.  The  tall  white  houses  cluster 
close  together,  and  the  overhanging  eaves  seem 
almost  to  meet  across  the  narrow  paved  streets,  and 
always  there  is  the  great  square,  with  the  church 
the  centre  of  all. 

It  would  be  almost  a  day's  journey  to  follow  the 
white  road  that  leads  down  from  Perugia  across 
the  plain  to  the  little  hill  town  of  Assisi,  and  many 
a  spring  morning  saw  the  painter-monk  setting 
out  on  the  convent  donkey  before  sunrise  and  re- 
turning when  the  sun  had  set.  He  would  thread 


16  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

his  way  up  between  the  olive-trees  until  he  reached 
the  city  gates,  and  pass  into  the  little  town  without 
hindrance.  For  the  followers  of  St.  Francis  in  their 
brown  robes  would  be  glad  to  welcome  a  stranger 
monk,  though  his  black  robe  showed  that  he 
belonged  to  a  different  order.  Any  one  who  came 
to  see  the  glory  of  their  city,  the  church  where 
their  saint  lay,  which  Giotto  had  covered  with  his 
wonderful  pictures,  was  never  refused  admittance. 

How  often  then  must  Fra  Angelico  have  knelt 
in  the  dim  light  of  that  lower  church  of  Assisi, 
learning  his  lesson  on  his  knees,  as  was  ever  his 
habit.  Then  home  again  he  would  wend  his  way, 
his  eyes  filled  with  visions  of  those  beautiful  pic- 
tures, and  his  hand  longing  for  the  pencil  and  brush, 
that  he  might  add  new  beauty  to  his  own  work  from 
what  he  had  learned. 

Several  years  passed  by,  and  at  last  the  brothers 
were  allowed  to  return  to  their  convent  home  of 
San  Dominico  at  Fiesole,  and  there  they  lived 
peaceably  for  a  long  time.  We  cannot  tell  exactly 
what  pictures  our  painter-monk  painted  during 
those  peaceful  years,  but  we  know  he  must  have 
been  looking  out  with  wise,  seeing  eyes,  drinking  in 
all  the  beauty  that  was  spread  around  him. 

At  his  feet  lay  Florence,  with  its  towers  and 
palaces,  the  Arno  running  through  it  like  a  silver 
thread,  and  beyond,  the  purple  of  the  Tuscan  hills. 
All  around  on  the  sheltered  hillside  were  green 
vines  and  fruit-trees,  olives  and  cypresses,  fields 
flaming  in  spring  with  scarlet  anemones  or  golden 
with  great  yellow  tulips,  and  hedges  of  rose-bushes 


FRA  ANGELICO  17 

covered  with  clusters  of  pink  blossoms.  No  wonder, 
then,  such  beauty  sunk  into  his  heart,  and  we  see 
in  his  pictures  the  pure  fresh  colour  of  the  spring 
flowers,  with  no  shadow  of  dark  or  evil  things. 

Soon  the  fame  of  the  painter  began  to  be  whispered 
outside  the  convent  walls,  and  reached  the  ears  of 
Cosimo  da  Medici,  one  of  the  powerful  rulers  of 
Florence.  He  offered  the  monks  a  new  home,  and, 
when  they  were  settled  in  the  convent  of  San  Marco 
in  Florence,  he  invited  Fra  Angelico  to  fresco  the 
walls. 

One  by  one  the  heavenly  pictures  were  painted 
upon  the  walls  of  the  cells  and  cloister  of  the  new 
home.  How  the  brothers  must  have  crowded  round 
to  see  each  new  fresco  as  it  was  finished,  and  how 
anxious  they  would  be  to  see  which  picture  was  to 
be  near  their  own  particular  bed.  In  all  the 
frescoes,  whether  he  painted  the  gentle  Virgin 
bending  before  the  angel  messenger,  or  tried  to 
show  the  glory  of  the  ascended  Lord,  the  artist- 
monk  would  always  introduce  one  or  more  of  the 
convent's  special  saints,  which  made  the  brothers 
feel  that  the  pictures  were  their  very  own.  Fra 
Angelico  had  a  kind  word  and  smile  for  all  the 
brothers.  He  was  never  impatient,  and  no  one 
ever  saw  him  angry,  for  he  was  as  humble  and 
gentle  as  the  saints  whose  pictures  he  loved  to 
paint. 

It  is  told  of  him,  too,  that  he  never  took  a  brush 
or  pencil  in  his  hand  without  a  prayer  that  his  work 
might  be  to  the  glory  of  God.  Often  when  he 
painted  the  sufferings  of  our  Lord,  the  tears  would 

B 


18  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

be  seen  running  down  his  cheeks  and  almost  blind- 
ing his  eyes. 

There  is  an  old  legend  which  tells  of  a  certain 
monk  who,  when  he  was  busily  illuminating  a  page 
of  his  missal,  was  called  away  to  do  some  service 
for  the  poor.  He  went  unwillingly,  the  legend 
says,  for  he  longed  to  put  the  last  touches  to  the 
holy  picture  he  was  painting ;  but  when  he  returned, 
lo !  he  found  his  work  finished  by  angel  hands. 

Often  when  we  look  at.  some  of  Fra  Angelico's 
pictures  we  are  reminded  of  this  legend,  and  feel 
that  he  too  might  have  been  helped  by  those  same 
angel  hands.  Did  they  indeed  touch  his  eyes  that 
he  might  catch  glimpses  of  a  Heaven  where  saints 
were  swinging  their  golden  censers,  and  white-robed 
angels  danced  in  the  flowery  meadows  of  Paradise  ? 
We  cannot  tell ;  but  this  we  know,  that  no  other 
painter  has  ever  shown  us  such  a  glory  of  heavenly 
things. 

Best  of  all,  the  angel-painter  loved  to  paint 
pictures  of  the  life  of  our  Lord  ;  and  in  the  picture 
1  have  shown  you,  you  will  see  the  tender  care  with 
which  he  has  drawn  the  head  of  the  Infant  Jesus 
with  His  little  golden  halo,  the  Madonna  in  her 
robe  of  purest  blue,  holding  the  Baby  close  in  her 
arms,  St.  Joseph  the  guardian  walking  at  the  side, 
and  all  around  the  flowers  and  trees  which  he  loved 
so  well  in  the  quiet  home  of  Fiesole. 

He  did  not  care  for  fame  or  power,  this  dreamy 
painter  of  angels,  and  when  the  Pope  invited  him  to 
Rome  to  paint  the  walls  of  a  chapel  there,  he 
thought  no  more  of  the  glory  and  honour  than  if  he 


CION6MFYGIENSIMANSI   INSOUTYD1NP.  PS.  XV  XV  VY-  G  ' 


ACCIPF  PYFRYfUNATREH  FPl  FVSE 


THE    FLIGHT    INTO    EGYPT.      By    FRA    ANGELICO 
The  Madonna  in  her  robe  of  purest  blue  holding-  the  Baby  close  in  her  arms" 


THE  I  av 

3LIC  LIBRARY 


FOUNDATIONS. 


FRA  ANGELICO  19 

was  but  called  upon  to  paint  another  cell  at 
San  Marco. 

But  when  the  Pope  had  seen  what  this  quiet  monk 
could  do,  he  called  the  artist  to  him. 

'A  man  who  can  paint  such  pictures,'  he  said, 
'must  be  a  good  man,  and  one  who  will  do  well 
whatever  he  undertakes.  Will  you,  then,  do  other 
work  for  me,  and  become  my  Archbishop  at 
Florence  ? '  But  the  painter  was  startled  and  dis- 
mayed. 

*I  cannot  teach  or  preach  or  govern  men,'  he 
said,  '  I  can  but  use  my  gift  of  painting  for  the 
glory  of  God.  Let  me  rather  be  as  I  am,  for  it  is 
safer  to  obey  than  to  rule.' 

But  though  he  would  not  take  this  honour  him- 
self, he  told  the  Pope  of  a  friend  of  his,  a  humble 
brother,  Fra  Antonino,  at  the  convent  of  San  Marco, 
who  was  well  fitted  to  do  the  work.  So  the  Pope 
took  the  painter's  advice,  and  the  choice  was  so 
wise  and  good,  that  to  this  day  the  Florentine  people 
talk  lovingly  of  their  good  bishop  Antonino. 

It  was  while  he  was  at  work  in  Rome  that  Fra 
Angelico  died,  so  his  body  does  not  rest  in  his  own 
beloved  Florence.  But  if  his  body  lies  in  Rome, 
his  gentle  spirit  still  seems  to  hover  around  the  old 
convent  of  S#n  Marco,  and  there  we  learn  to  know 
and  love  him  best.  Little  wonder  that  in  after 
ages  they  looked  upon  him  almost  as  a  saint,  and 
gave  him  the  title  of  '  Beato,'  or  the  blessed  angel  - 
painter. 


MASACCIO 

IT  must  have  been  about  the  same  time  when  Fra 
Angelico  was  covering  the  walls  of  San  Marco  with 
his  angel  pictures,  that  a  very  different  kind  of 
painter  was  working  in  the  Carmine  church  in 
Florence. 

This  was  no  gentle,  refined  monk,  but  just  an 
ordinary  man  of  the  world --an  awkward,  good- 
natured  person,  who,  as  long  as  he  had  pictures 
to  paint,  cared  for  little  else.  Why,  he  would  even 
forget  to  ask  for  payment  when  his  work  was  done ; 
and  as  to  taking  care  of  his  clothes,  or  trying  to 
keep  himself  tidy,  that  was  a  thing  he  never  thought 
of! 

What  trouble  his  mother  must  have  had  with 
him  when  he  was  a  boy !  It  was  no  use  sending 
him  on  an  errand,  he  would  forget  it  before  he  had 
gone  a  hundred  yards,  and  he  was  so  careless  and 
untidy  that  it  was  enough  to  make  any  one  lose 
patience  with  him.  But  only  let  him  have  a  pencil 
and  a  smooth  surface  on  which  to  draw,  and  he  was 
a  different  boy. 

It  is  said  that  even  now,  in  the  little  town  of 
Castello  San  Giovanni,  some  eighteen  miles  from 
Florence,  where  Tommaso  was  born,  there  are  still 
some  wonderfully  good  figures  to  be  seen,  drawn 


20 


MASACCIO  21 

by  him  when  he  was  quite  a  little  boy.  Certainly 
there  was  no  carelessness  and  nothing  untidy  about 
his  work. 

As  the  boy  grew  older  all  his  longings  would 
turn  towards  Florence,  the  beautiful  city  where 
there  was  everything  to  learn  and  to  see,  and  so  he 
was  sent  to  become  a  pupil  in  the  studio  of  Masolino, 
a  great  Florentine  painter.  But  though  his  draw- 
ings improved,  his  careless  habits  continued  the 
same. 

'  There  goes  Tommaso  the  painter,'  the  people 
would  say,  watching  the  big  awkward  figure  passing 
through  the  streets  on  his  way  to  work.  '  Truly 
he  pays  but  little  heed  to  his  appearance.  Look 
but  at  his  untidy  hair  and  the  holes  in  his  boots.' 

'  Ay,  indeed  ! '  another  would  answer ;  '  and  yet 
it  is  said  if  only  people  paid  him  all  they  owed  he 
would  have  gold  enough  and  to  spare.  But  what 
cares  he  so  long  as  he  has  his  paints  and  brushes  ? 
"  Masaccio  "  would  be  a  fitter  name  for  him  than 
Tommaso.' 

So  the  name  Masaccio,  or  Ugly  Tom,  came  to 
be  that  by  which  the  big  awkward  painter  was 
known.  But  no  one  thinks  of  the  unkind  meaning 
of  the  nickname  now,  for  Masaccio  is  honoured  as 
one  of  the  great  names  in  the  history  of  Art. 

This  painter,  careless  of  many  things,  cared  with 
all  his  heart  and  soul  for  the  work  he  had  chosen 
to  do.  It  seemed  to  him  that  painters  had  always 
failed  to  make  their  pictures  like  living  things. 
The  pictures  they  painted  were  flat,  not  round  as 
a  figure  should  be,  and  very  often  the  feet  did  not 


22  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

look  as  if  they  were  standing  on  the  ground  at  all, 
but  pointed  downwards  as  if  they  were  hanging  in 
the  air. 

So  he  worked  with  light  and  shadow  and  careful 
drawing  until  the  figures  he  drew  looked  rounded 
instead  of  flat,  and  their  feet  were  planted  firmly 
on  the  ground.  His  models  were  taken  from  the 
ordinary  Florentine  youths  whom  he  saw  daily  in 
the  studio,  but  he  drew  them  as  no  one  had  drawn 
figures  before.  The  buildings,  too,  he  made  to  look 
like  real  houses  leading  away  into  the  distance,  and 
not  just  like  a  flat  picture. 

He  painted  many  frescoes  both  in  Florence  and 
Rome,  this  Ugly  Tom,  but  at  the  time  the  people 
did  not  pay  him  much  honour,  for  they  thought  him 
just  a  great  awkward  fellow  with  his  head  always 
in  the  clouds.  Perhaps  if  he  had  lived  longer  fame 
and  wealth  would  have  come  to  him,  but  he  died 
when  he  was  still  a  young  man,  and  only  a  few 
realised  how  great  he  was. 

But  in  after  years,  one  by  one,  all  the  great 
artists  would  come  to  that  little  chapel  of  the 
Carmine  there  to  learn  their  first  lessons  from  those 
life-like  figures.  Especially  they  would  stand  before 
the  fresco  which  shows  St.  Peter  baptizing  a  crowd 
of  people.  And  in  that  fresco  they  would  study 
more  than  all  the  figure  of  a  boy  who  has  just  come 
out  of  the  water,  shivering  with  cold,  the  most 
natural  figure  that  had  ever  been  painted  up  to  that 
time. 

All  things  must  be  learnt  little  by  little,  and 
each  new  thing  we  know  is  a  step  onwards.  So 


Drawing  by   MASACCIO 
models  were  ordinary  Florentine  youtbs" 


PUBLIC  LIBKAR 


ASTOR,   LilNOX  AND 
ILDt-D    FOUNDATIONS. 


MASACCIO  23 

this  figure  of  the  shivering  boy  marks  a  higher  step 
on  the  golden  ladder  of  Art  than  any  that  had 
been  touched  before.  And  this  alone  would  have 
made  the  name  of  Masaccio  worthy  to  be  placed 
upon  the  list  of  the  world's  great  painters. 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI 

IT  was  winter  time  in  Florence.  The  tramontana, 
that  keen  wind  which  blows  from  over  the  snow 
mountains,  was  sweeping  down  the  narrow  streets, 
searching  out  every  nook  and  corner  with  its  icy 
breath.  Men  flung  their  cloaks  closer  round  them, 
and  pulled  their  hats  down  over  their  eyes,  so  that 
only  the  tips  of  their  noses  were  left  uncovered  for 
the  wind  to  freeze.  Women  held  their  scaldinoes, 
little  pots  of  hot  charcoal,  closer  under  their  shawls, 
and  even  the  dogs  had  a  sad,  half-frozen  look. 
One  and  all  longed  for  the  warm  winds  of  spring 
and  the  summer  heat  they  loved.  It  was  bad 
enough  for  those  who  had  warm  clothes  and  plenty 
of  polenta,  but  for  the  poor  life  was  very  hard  those 
cold  wintry  days. 

In  a  doorway  of  a  great  house,  in  one  of  the  narrow 
streets,  a  little  boy  of  eight  was  crouching  behind 
one  of  the  stone  pillars  as  he  tried  to  keep  out  of 
the  grip  of  the  tramontana.  His  little  coat  was 
folded  closely  round  him,  but  it  was  full  of  rents  and 
holes  so  that  the  thin  body  inside  was  scarcely 
covered,  and  the  child's  blue  lips  trembled  with  the 
cold,  and  his  black  eyes  filled  with  tears. 

It  was  not  often  that  Filippo  turned  such  a  sad 
little  face  to  meet  the  world.  Usually  those  black 

24 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  25 

eyes  sparkled  with  fun  and  mischief,  and  the  mouth 
spread  itself  into  a  merry  grin.  But  to-day,  truly 
things  were  worse  than  he  ever  remembered  them 
before,  and  he  could  remember  fairly  bad  times,  too, 
if  he  tried. 

Other  children  had  their  fathers  and  mothers  who 
gave  them  food  and  clothes,  but  he  seemed  to  be 
quite  different,  and  never  had  had  any  one  to  care 
for  him.  True,  there  was  his  aunt,  old  Mona 
Lapaccia,  who  said  he  had  once  had  a  father  and 
mother  like  other  boys,  but  she  always  added  with 
a  mournful  shake  of  her  head  that  she  alone  had 
endured  all  the  trouble  and  worry  of  bringing  him 
up  since  he  was  two  years  old.  *  Ah,'  she  would 
say,  turning  her  eyes  upwards,  'the  saints  alone 
know  what  I  have  endured  with  a  great  hungry 
boy  to  feed  and  clothe.' 

It  seemed  to  Filippo  that  in  that  case  the  saints 
must  also  know  how  very  little  he  had  to  eat,  and 
how  cold  he  was  on  these  wintry  days.  But  of 
course  they  would  be  too  grand  to  care  about  a 
little  boy. 

In  summer  things  were  different.  One  could 
roll  merrily  about  in  the  sunshine  all  day  long,  and 
at  night  sleep  in  some  cool  sheltering  corner  of  the 
street.  And  then,  too,  there  was  always  a  better 
chance  of  picking  up  something  to  eat.  Plenty  of 
fig  skins  and  melon  parings  were  flung  carelessly  out 
into  the  street  when  fruit  was  plentiful,  and  people 
would  often  throw  away  the  remains  of  a  bunch 
of  grapes.  It  was  wonderful  how  quickly  Filippo 
learned  to  know  people's  faces,  and  to  guess  who 


26  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

would  finish  to  the  last  grape  and  who  would  throw 
the  smaller  ones  away.  Some  would  even  smile  as 
they  caught  his  anxious,  waiting  eye  fixed  on  the 
fruit,  and  would  cry  *  Catch '  as  they  threw  a  goodly 
bunch  into  those  small  brown  hands  that  never  let 
anything  slip  through  their  fingers. 

Oh,  yes,  summer  was  all  right,  but  there  was  always 
winter  to  face.  To-day  he  was  so  very  hungry,  and 
the  lupin  skins  which  he  had  collected  for  his  break- 
fast were  all  eaten  long  ago.  He  had  hung  about 
the  little  open  shops,  sniffing  up  the  delicious  smell 
of  fried  polenta,  but  no  one  had  given  him  a  morsel. 
All  he  had  got  was  a  stern  *  be  off'  when  he  ventured 
too  close  to  the  tempting  food.  If  only  this  day 
had  been  a  festa,  he  might  have  done  well  enough. 
For  in  the  great  processions  when  the  priests  and 
people  carried  their  lighted  candles  round  the  church, 
he  could  always  dart  in  and  out  with  his  little  iron 
scraper,  lift  the  melted  wax  off  the  marble  floor  and 
sell  it  over  again  to  the  candlemakers. 

But  there  were  no  processions  to-day,  and  there 
remained  only  one  thing  to  be  done.  He  must  go 
home  and  see  if  Mona  Lapaccia  had  anything  to 
spare.  Perhaps  the  saints  took  notice  when  he  was 
hungry. 

Down  the  street  he  ran,  keeping  close  to  the  wall, 
just  as  the  dogs  do  when  it  rains.  For  the  great 
overhanging  eaves  of  the  houses  act  as  a  sheltering 
umbrella.  Then  out  into  the  broad  street  that  runs 
beside  the  river,  where,  even  in  winter,  the  sun  shines 
warmly  if  it  shines  anywhere. 

Filippo  paused  at  the  corner  of  the  Ponte  alia 


FRA  FIL1PPO  LIPPI  27 

Carraja  to  watch  the  struggles  of  a  poor  mule  which 
was  trying  to  pull  a  huge  cartload  of  wood  up  the 
steep  incline  of  the  bridge.  It  was  so  exciting  that 
for  a  moment  he  forgot  how  cold  and  hungry  he  was, 
as  he  shouted  and  screamed  directions  with  the  rest 
of  the  crowd,  darted  in  and  out  in  his  eagerness  to 
help,  and  only  got  into  every  one's  way. 

That  excitement  over,  Filippo  felt  in  better  spirits 
and  ran  quickly  across  the  bridge.  He  soon  threaded 
his  way  to  a  poor  street  that  led  towards  one  of  the 
city  gates,  where  everything  looked  dirtier  and  more 
cheerless  than  ever.  He  had  not  expected  a  welcome, 
and  he  certainly  did  not  get  one,  as,  after  climbing 
the  steep  stairs,  he  cautiously  pushed  open  the  door 
and  peeped  in. 

His  aunt's  thin  face  looked  dark  and  angry.  Poor 
soul,  she  had  had  no  breakfast  either,  and  there  would 
be  no  food  that  day  unless  her  work  was  finished. 
And  here  was  this  troublesome  boy  back  again,  when 
she  thought  she  had  got  rid  of  him  for  the  day. 

'  Away ! '  she  shouted  crossly.  '  What  dost  thou 
mean  by  coming  back  so  soon  ?  Away,  and  seek  thy 
living  in  the  streets.' 

'  It  is  too  cold,'  said  the  boy,  creeping  into  the  bare 
room,  '  and  I  am  hungry.' 

'  Hungry  1 '  and  poor  Mona  Lapaccia  cast  her  eyes 
upwards,  as  if  she  would  ask  the  saints  if  they  too 
were  not  filled  with  surprise  to  hear  this  word.  '  And 
when  art  thou  anything  else  ?  It  is  ever  the  same 
story  with  thee :  eat,  eat,  eat.  Now,  the  saints  help 
me,  I  have  borne  this  burden  long  enough.  I  will 
see  if  I  cannot  shift  it  on  to  other  shoulders. ' 


28  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

She  rose  as  she  spoke,  tied  her  yellow  handkerchief 
over  her  head  and  smoothed  out  her  apron.  Then 
she  caught  Filippo  by  his  shoulder  and  gave  him  a 
good  shake,  just  to  teach  him  how  wrong  it  was  to 
talk  of  being  hungry,  and  pushing  him  in  front  of  her 
they  went  downstairs  together. 

'  Where  art  thou  going  ? '  gasped  the  boy  as  she 
dragged  him  swiftly  along  the  street. 

'  Wait  and  thou  shalt  see,'  she  answered  shortly ; 
'  and  do  thou  mind  thy  manners,  else  will  I  mind 
them  for  thee.' 

Filippo  ran  along  a  little  quicker  on  hearing  this 
advice.  He  had  but  a  dim  notion  of  what  minding 
his  manners  might  mean,  but  he  guessed  fairly  well 
what  would  happen  if  his  aunt  minded  them.  Ah ! 
here  they  were  at  the  great  square  of  the  Carmine. 
He  had  often  crept  into  the  church  to  get  warm  and 
to  see  those  wonderful  pictures  on  the  walls.  Could 
they  be  going  there  now  ? 

But  it  was  towards  the  convent  door  that  Mona 
Lapaccia  bent  her  steps,  and,  when  she  had  rung  the 
bell,  she  gave  Filippo's  shoulder  a  final  shake,  and 
pulled  his  coat  straight  and  smoothed  his  hair. 

A  fat,  good-natured  brother  let  them  in,  and  led 
them  through  the  many  passages  into  a  room  where 
the  prior  sat  finishing  his  midday  meal. 

Filippo's  hungry  eyes  were  immediately  fixed  on 
a  piece  of  bread  which  lay  upon  the  table,  and 
the  kindly  prior  smiled  as  he  nodded  his  head 
towards  it. 

Not  another  invitation  did  Filippo  need ;  like  a 
bird  he  darted  forward  and  snatched  the  piece  of 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  29 

good  white  bread,  and  holding  it  in  both  hands  he 
began  to  munch  to  his  heart's  content.  How  long 
it  was  since  he  had  tasted  anything  like  this  !  It 
was  so  delicious  that  for  a  few  blissful  moments  he 
forgot  where  he  was,  forgot  his  aunt  and  the  great 
man  who  was  looking  at  him  with  such  kind  eyes. 

But  presently  he   heard    his   own  name  spoken 
and  then  he   looked   up    and  remembered.      'And 
so,  Filippo,  thou  wouldst  become  a  monk  ? '  the  prior 
was  saying.     '  Let  me  see — how  old  art  thou  ? ' 

'  Eight  years  old,  your  reverence,'  said  Mona 
Lapaccia  before  Filippo  could  answer.  Which  was 
just  as  well,  as  his  mouth  was  still  very  full. 

'  And  it  is  thy  desire  to  leave  the  world,  and 
enter  our  convent  ? '  continued  the  prior.  '  Art 
thou  willing  to  give  up  all,  that  thou  mayest 
become  a  servant  of  God  ? ' 

The  little  dirty  brown  hands  clutched  the  bread 
in  dismay.  Did  the  kind  man  mean  that  he  was  to 
give  up  his  bread  when  he  had  scarcely  eaten  half 
of  it? 

'  No,  no  ;  eat  thy  bread,  child,'  said  the  prior,  with 
an  understanding  nod.  '  Thou  art  but  a  babe,  but  we 
will  make  a  good  monk  of  thee  yet.' 

Then,  indeed,  began  happy  days  for  Filippo.  No 
more  threadbare  coats,  but  a  warm  little  brown 
serge  robe,  tied  round  the  waist  with  a  rope  whose 
ends  grew  daily  shorter  as  the  way  round  his  waist 
grew  longer.  No  more  lupin  skins  and  whiffs  of 
fried  polenta,  but  food  enough  and  to  spare ;  such 
food  as  he  had  not  dreamt  of  before,  and  always  as 
much  as  he  could  eat. 


30  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Filippo  was  as  happy  as  the  day  was  long.  He 
had  always  been  a  merry  little  soul  even  when  life 
had  been  hard  and  food  scarce,  and  now  he  would 
not  have  changed  his  lot  with  the  saints  in  Paradise. 

But  the  good  brothers  began  to  think  it  was  time 
Filippo  should  do  something  besides  play  and 
eat. 

'  Let  us  see  what  the  child  is  fit  for,'  they  said. 

So  Filippo  was  called  in  to  sit  on  the  bench  with 
the  boys  and  learn  his  ABC.  That  was  dreadfully 
dull  work.  He  could  never  remember  the  names  of 
those  queer  signs.  Their  shapes  he  knew  quite 
well,  and  he  could  draw  them  carefully  in  his  copy- 
book, but  their  names  were  too  much  for  him.  And 
as  to  the  Latin  which  the  good  monks  tried  to 
teach  him,  they  might  as  well  have  tried  to  teach  a 
monkey. 

All  the  brightness  faded  from  Filippo's  face  the 
moment  a  book  was  put  before  him,  and  he  looked 
so  dull  and  stupid  that  the  brothers  were  in  despair. 
Then  for  a  little  things  seemed  to  improve.  Filippo 
suddenly  lost  his  stupid  look  as  he  bent  over  the 
pages,  and  his  eyes  were  bright  with  interest. 

'  Aha ! '  said  one  brother  nudging  the  other,  *  the 
boy  has  found  his  brains  at  last.' 

But  great  indeed  was  their  wrath  and  disappoint- 
ment when  they  looked  over  his  shoulder.  Instead 
of  learning  his  lessons,  Filippo  had  been  making  all 
sorts  of  queer  drawings  round  the  margin  of  the 
page.  The  A's  and  B's  had  noses  and  eyes,  and 
looked  out  with  little  grinning  faces.  The  long 
music  notes  had  legs  and  arms  and  were  dancing 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  31 

about    like    little     black    imps.      Everything    was 
scribbled  over  with  the  naughty  little  figures. 

This  was  really  too  much,  and  Filippo  must  be 
taken  at  once  before  the  prior. 

'  What,  in  disgrace  again  ? '  asked  the  kindly  old 
man.  '  What  has  the  child  done  now  ? ' 

'  We  can  teach  him  nothing,'  said  the  brother, 
shaking  a  severe  finger  at  Filippo,  who  hung  his 
head.  '  He  cannot  even  learn  his  ABC.  And 
besides,  he  spoils  his  books,  ay,  and  even  the  walls 
and  benches,  by  drawing  such  things  as  these  upon 
them.'  And  the  indignant  monk  held  out  the  book 
where  all  those  naughty  figures  were  dancing  over 
the  page. 

The  prior  took  the  book  and  looked  at  it  closely. 

*  What  makes  thee  do  these  things  ? '  he  asked 
the  boy,  who  stood  first  on  one  foot  and  then  on  the 
other,  twisting  his  rope  in  his  fingers. 

At  the  sound  of  the  kind  voice,  the  boy  looked 
up,  and  his  face  broke  into  a  smile. 

'  Indeed,  I  cannot  help  it,  Father,'  he  said.  '  It  is 
the  fault  of  these,'  and  he  spread  out  his  ten  little 
brown  fingers. 

The  prior  laughed. 

'  Well,' he  said,  '  we  will  not  turn  thee  out,  though 
they  do  say  thou  wilt  never  make  a  monk.  Perhaps 
we  may  teach  these  ten  little  rascals  to  do  good 
work,  even  if  we  cannot  put  learning  into  that 
round  head  of  thine.' 

So  instead  of  books  and  Latin  lessons,  the  good 
monks  tried  a  different  plan.  Filippo  was  given  as 
a  pupil  to  good  Brother  Anselmo,  whose  work  it  was 


32  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

to  draw  the  delicate  pictures  and  letters  for  the 
convent  prayer-books. 

This  was  a  different  kind  of  lesson,  indeed. 
Filippo's  eyes  shone  with  eagerness  as  he  bent  over 
his  work  and  tried  to  copy  the  beautiful  lines  and 
curves  which  the  master  set  for  him. 

There  were  other  boys  in  the  class  as  well,  and 
Filippo  looked  at  their  work  with  great  admiration. 
One  boy  especially,  who  was  bigger  than  Filippo, 
and  who  had  a  kind  merry  face,  made  such  beautiful 
copies  that  Filippo  always  tried  to  sit  next  him  if 
possible.  Very  soon  the  boys  became  great  friends. 

Diamante,  as  the  elder  boy  was  called,  was 
pleased  to  be  admired  so  much  by  the  little  new 
pupil ;  but  as  time  went  on,  his  pride  in  his  own 
work  grew  less  as  he  saw  with  amazement  how 
quickly  Filippo's  little  brown  fingers  learned  to 
draw  straighter  lines  and  more  beautiful  curves  than 
any  he  could  manage.  Brother  Anselmo,  too,  would 
watch  the  boy  at  work,  and  his  saintly  old  face 
beamed  with  pleasure  as  he  looked. 

'  He  will  pass  us  all,  and  leave  us  far  behind,  this 
child  who  is  too  stupid  to  learn  his  A  B  C,'  he 
would  say,  and  his  face  shone  with  unselfish  joy. 

Then  when  the  boys  grew  older,  they  were 
allowed  to  go  into  the  church  and  watch  those 
wonderful  frescoes,  which  grew  under  the  hand  of 
the  great  awkward  painter,  *  Ugly  Tom,'  as  he  was 
called. 

Together  Filippo  and  Diamante  stood  and  watched 
with  awe,  learning  lessons  there  which  the  good 
father  had  not  been  able  to  teach.  Then  they 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  33 

would  begin  to  put  into  practice  what  they  had 
learned,  and  try  to  copy  in  their  own  pictures  the 
work  of  the  great  master. 

'  Thou  hast  the  knack  of  it,  Filippo,'  Diamante 
would  say  as  he  looked  with  envy  at  the  figures 
Filippo  drew  so  easily. 

'  Thy  pictures  are  also  good,'  Filippo  would 
answer  quickly,  '  and  thou  thyself  art  better  than 
any  one  else  in  the  convent.' 

There  was  no  complaint  now  of  Filippo's  dullness. 
He  soon  learned  all  that  the  painter-monks  could 
teach  him,  and  as  years  passed  on  the  prior  would 
rub  his  hands  in  delight  to  think  that  here  was  an 
artist,  one  of  themselves,  who  would  soon  be  able  to 
paint  the  walls  of  the  church  and  convent,  and  make 
them  as  famous  as  the  convent  of  San  Marco  had 
been  made  famous  by  its  angelical  painter. 

Then  one  day  he  called  Filippo  to  him. 

*  My  son/  he  said,  '  you  have  learned  well,  and  it  is 
time  now  to  turn  your  work  to  some  account.  Go 
into  the  cloister  where  the  walls  have  been  but 
newly  whitewashed,  and  let  us  see  what  kind  of 
pictures  thou  canst  paint.' 

With  burning  cheeks  and  shining  eyes,  Filippo 
began  his  work.  Day  after  day  he  stood  on  the 
scaffolding,  with  his  brown  robe  pinned  back  and 
his  bare  arm  moving  swiftly  as  he  drew  figure  after 
figure  on  the  smooth  white  wall. 

He  did  not  pause  to  think  what  he  would  draw, 
the  figures  seemed  to  grow  like  magic  under  his 
touch.  There  were  the  monks  in  their  brown  and 
white  robes,  fat  and  laughing,  or  lean  and  anxious- 

c 


34  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

minded.  There  were  the  people  who  came  to  say 
their  prayers  in  church,  little  children  clinging  to 
their  mothers'  skirts,  beggars  and  rich  folks,  even 
the  stray  dog  that  sometimes  wandered  in.  Yes, 
and  the  pretty  girls  who  laughed  and  talked  in 
whispers.  He  drew  them  all,  just  as  he  had  often 
seen  them.  Then,  when  the  last  piece  of  wall  was 
covered,  he  stopped  his  work. 

The  news  soon  spread  through  all  the  convent 
that  Brother  Filippo  had  finished  his  picture,  and  all 
the  monks  came  hurrying  to  see.  The  scaffolding 
was  taken  down,  and  then  they  all  stood  round, 
gazing  with  round  eyes  and  open  mouths.  They 
had  never  seen  anything  like  it  before,  and  at  first 
there  was  silence  except  for  one  long  drawn  *  ah-h.' 

Then  one  by  one  they  began  to  laugh  and  talk, 
and  point  with  eager,  excited  fingers.  '  Look,' 
cried  one,  '  there  is  Brother  Giovanni ;  I  would  know 
his  smile  among  a  hundred.' 

'  There  is  that  beggar  who  comes  each  day  to  ask 
for  soup,'  cried  another. 

'  And  there  is  his  dog,'  shouted  a  third. 

'  Look  at  the  maid  who  kneels  in  front,'  said  Fra 
Diamante  in  a  hushed  voice,  *  is  she  not  as  fair  as 
any  saint  ? ' 

Then  suddenly  there  was  silence,  and  the  brothers 
looked  ashamed  of  the  noise  they  had  been  making, 
as  the  prior  himself  looked  down  on  them  from  the 
steps  above. 

'  What  is  all  this  ? '  he  asked.  And  his  voice 
sounded  grave  and  displeased  as  he  looked  from  the 
wall  to  the  crowd  of  eager  monks.  Then  he  turned 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  85 

to  Filippo.  *  Are  these  the  pictures  I  ordered  thee 
to  paint  ? '  he  asked.  '  Is  this  the  kind  of  painting  to 
do  honour  to  God  and  to  our  Church  ?  Will  these 
mere  human  figures  help  men  to  remember  the 
saints,  teach  them  to  look  up  to  heaven,  or  help 
them  with  their  prayers  ?  Quick,  rub  them  out, 
and  paint  your  pictures  for  heaven  and  not  for 
earth.' 

Filippo  hung  his  head,  the  crowd  of  admiring 
monks  swiftly  disappeared,  and  he  was  left  to  begin 
his  work  all  over  again. 

It  was  so  difficult  for  Filippo  to  keep  his  thoughts 
fixed  on  heaven,  and  not  to  think  of  earth.  He  did 
so  love  the  merry  world,  and  his  fingers,  those  same 
ten  brown  rascals  which  had  got  him  into  trouble 
when  he  was  a  child,  always  longed  to  draw  just 
the  faces  that  he  saw  every  day.  The  pretty  face 
of  the  little  maid  kneeling  at  her  prayers  was  so 
real  and  so  delightful,  and  the  Madonna  and  angels 
seemed  so  solemn  and  far  off. 

Still  no  one  would  have  pictures  which  did  not 
tell  of  saints  and  angels,  so  he  must  paint  the  best 
he  could.  After  all,  it  was  easy  to  put  on  wings  and 
golden  haloes  until  the  earthly  things  took  on  a 
heavenly  look. 

But  the  convent  life  grew  daily  more  and  more 
wearisome  now  to  Filippo.  The  world,  which  he 
had  been  so  willing  to  give  up  for  a  piece  of  good 
white  bread  when  he  was  eight  years  old,  now 
seemed  full  of  all  the  things  he  loved  best. 

The  more  he  thought  of  it,  the  more  he  longed 
to  see  other  places  outside  the  convent  walls,  and 


36  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

other  faces  besides  the  monks  and  the  people  who 
came  to  church. 

And  so  one  dark  night,  when  all  the  brothers  were 
asleep  and  the  bells  had  just  rung  the  midnight 
hour,  Fra  Filippo  stole  out  of  his  cell,  unlocked 
the  convent  door,  and  ran  swiftly  out  into  the  quiet 
street. 

How  good  it  felt  to  be  free !  The  very  street 
itself  seemed  like  an  old  friend,  welcoming  him  with 
open  arms.  On  and  on  he  ran  until  he  came  to  the 
city  gates  of  San  Frediano,  there  to  wait  until  he 
could  slip  through  unnoticed  when  the  gates  were 
opened  at  the  dawn  of  day.  Then  on  again  until 
Florence  and  the  convent  were  left  behind  and  the 
whole  world  lay  before  him. 

There  was  no  difficulty  about  living,  for  the 
people  gave  him  food  and  money,  and  good-natured 
countrymen  would  stop  their  carts  and  offer  him  a 
lift  along  the  straight  white  dusty  roads.  So  by 
and  by  he  reached  Ancona  and  saw  for  the  first 
time  the  sea. 

Filippo  gazed  and  gazed,  forgetting  everything 
else  as  he  drank  in  the  beauty  of  that  great  stretch 
of  quivering  blue,  while  in  his  ears  sounded  words 
which  he  had  almost  forgotten — words  which  had 
fallen  on  heedless  ears  at  matins  or  vespers — and 
which  never  had  held  any  meaning  for  him  before  : 
'  And  before  the  throne  was  a  sea  of  glass,  like  unto 
crystal.' 

He  stood  still  for  a  few  minutes  and  then  the 
heavenly  vision  faded,  and  like  any  other  boy  he 
forgot  all  about  beauty  and  colour,  and  only  longed 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  37 

to  be  out  in  a  boat  enjoying  the  strange  new 
delight. 

Very  lucky  he  thought  himself  when  he  reached 
the  shore  to  find  a  boat  just  putting  off,  and  to  hear 
himself  invited  to  jump  in  by  the  boys  who  were 
going  for  a  sail. 

Away  they  went,  further  and  further  from  the 
shore,  laughing  and  talking.  The  boys  were  so 
busy  telling  wonderful  sea-tales  to  the  young 
stranger  that  they  did  not  notice  how  far  they  had 
gone.  Then  suddenly  they  looked  ahead  and  sat 
speechless  with  fear. 

A  great  Moorish  galley  was  bearing  down  upon 
them,  its  rows  of  oars  flashed  in  the  sunlight,  and 
its  great  painted  sails  towered  above  their  heads.  It 
was  no  use  trying  to  escape.  Those  strong  rowers 
easily  overtook  them,  and  in  a  few  minutes  Filippo 
and  his  companions  were  hoisted  up  on  board  the 
galley. 

It  was  all  so  sudden  that  it  seemed  like  a  dream. 
But  the  chains  were  very  real  that  were  fastened 
round  their  wrists  and  ankles,  and  the  dark  cruel 
faces  of  the  Moors  as  they  looked  on  smiling  at 
their  misery  were  certainly  no  dream. 

Then  followed  long  days  of  misery  when  the  new 
slaves  toiled  at  the  oars  under  the  blazing  sun,  and 
nights  of  cold  and  weariness.  Many  a  time  did 
Filippo  long  for  the  quiet  convent,  the  kindly 
brothers,  and  the  long  peaceful  days.  Many  a  time 
did  he  long  to  hear  the  bells  calling  him  to  prayer, 
which  had  once  only  filled  him  with  restless 
impatience. 


38  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

But  at  last  the  galley  reached  the  coast  of  Barbary, 
and  the  slaves  were  unchained  from  the  oars  and 
taken  ashore.  In  all  his  misery  Filippo's  keen  eyes 
still  watched  with  interest  the  people  around  him, 
and  he  was  never  tired  of  studying  the  swarthy 
faces  and  curious  garments  of  the  Moorish  pirates. 

Then  one  day  when  he  happened  to  be  near 
a  smooth  white  wall,  he  took  a  charred  stick  from 
a  fire  which  was  built  close  by,  and  began  to  draw 
the  figure  of  his  master. 

What  a  delight  it  was  to  draw  those  rapid  strokes 
and  feel  the  likeness  grow  beneath  his  fingers !  He 
was  so  much  interested  that  he  did  not  notice  the 
crowd  that  gathered  gradually  round  him,  but  he 
worked  steadily  on  until  the  figure  was  finished. 

Just  as  the  band  of  monks  had  stood  silent  round 
his  first  picture  in  the  cloister  of  the  Carmine,  so 
these  dark  Moors  stood  still  in  wonder  and  amaze- 
ment gazing  upon  the  bold  black  figure  sketched 
upon  the  smooth  white  wall. 

No  one  had  ever  seen  such  a  thing  in  that  land 
before,  and  it  seemed  to  them  that  this  man  must 
be  a  dealer  in  magic.  They  whispered  together,  and 
one  went  off  hurriedly  to  fetch  the  captain. 

The  master,  when  he  came,  was  as  astonished  as 
the  men.  He  could  scarcely  believe  his  eyes  when 
he  saw  a  second  self  drawn  upon  the  wall,  more  like 
than  his  own  shadow.  This  indeed  must  be  no 
common  man ;  and  he  ordered  that  Filippo's  chains 
should  be  immediately  struck  off,  and  that  he  should 
be  treated  with  respect  and  honour. 

Nothing  now  was  too  good  for  this  man  of  magic, 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  39 

and  before  long  Filippo  was  put  on  board  a  ship 
and  carried  safely  back  to  Italy.  They  put  him 
ashore  at  Naples,  and  for  some  little  time  Filippo 
stayed  there  painting  pictures  for  the  king ;  but  his 
heart  was  in  his  own  beloved  town,  and  very  soon 
he  returned  to  Florence. 

Perhaps  he  did  not  deserve  a  welcome,  but  every 
one  was  only  too  delighted  to  think  that  the  run- 
away had  really  returned.  Even  the  prior,  though 
he  shook  his  head,  was  glad  to  welcome  back  the 
brother  whose  painting  had  already  brought  fame 
and  honour  to  the  convent. 

But  in  spite  of  all  the  troubles  Filippo  had  gone 
through,  he  still  dearly  loved  the  merry  world  and 
all  its  pleasures.  For  a  long  time  he  would  paint 
his  saints  and  angels  with  all  due  diligence,  and 
then  he  would  dash  down  brushes  and  pencils,  leave 
his  paints  scattered  around,  and  off  he  would  go  for 
a  holiday.  Then  the  work  would  come  to  a  stand- 
still, and  people  must  just  wait  until  Filippo  should 
feel  inclined  to  begin  again. 

The  great  Cosimo  de  Medici,  who  was  always  the 
friend  of  painters,  desired  above  all  things  that 
Fra  Filippo  should  paint  a  picture  for  him.  And 
what  is  more,  having  heard  so  many  tales  about  the 
idle  ways  of  this  same  brother,  he  was  determined 
that  the  picture  should  be  painted  without  any 
interruptions. 

'  Fra  Filippo  shall  take  no  holidays  while  at  work 
for  me,'  he  said,  as  he  talked  the  matter  over  with 
the  prior. 

*  That  may  not  be  so  easy  as  thou  thinkest,'  said 


40  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  prior,  for  he  knew  Filippo  better  tnan  did  this 
great  Cosimo. 

But  Cosimo  did  not  see  any  difficulty  in  the 
matter  whatever.  High  in  his  palace  he  prepared 
a  room  for  the  painter,  and  placed  there  everything 
he  could  need.  No  comfort  was  lacking,  and  when 
Filippo  came  he  was  treated  as  an  honoured  guest, 
except  for  one  thing.  Whenever  the  heavy  door 
of  his  room  swung  to,  there  was  a  grating  sound 
heard,  and  the  key  in  the  lock  was  turned  from 
outside.  So  Filippo  was  really  a  captive  in  his 
handsome  prison. 

That  was  all  very  well  for  a  few  days.  Filippo 
laughed  as  he  painted  away,  and  laid  on  the  tender 
blue  of  the  Virgin's  robe,  and  painted  into  her  eyes 
the  solemn  look  which  he  had  so  often  seen  on  the 
face  of  some  poor  peasant  woman  as  she  knelt  at 
prayer.  But  after  a  while  he  grew  restless  and 
weary  of  his  work. 

*  Plague  take  this  great  man  and  his  fine  manners,' 
he  cried.  '  Does  he  think  he  can  catch  a  lark  and 
train  it  to  sing  in  a  cage  at  his  bidding  ?  I  am 
weary  of  saints  and  angels.  I  must  out  to  breathe 
the  fresh  sweet  air  of  heaven.' 

But  the  key  was  always  turned  in  the  lock  and 
the  door  was  strong.  There  was  the  window,  but 
it  was  high  above  the  street,  and  the  grey  walls, 
built  of  huge  square  stones,  might  well  have  been 
intended  to  enclose  a  prison  rather  than  a  palace. 

It  was  a  dark  night,  and  the  air  felt  hot  as  Filippo 
leaned  out  of  the  window.  Scarce  a  breath  stirred 
the  still  air,  and  every  sound  could  be  heard  dis- 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  41 

tinctly.  Far  below  in  the  street  he  could  hear  the 
tread  of  the  people's  feet,  and  catch  the  words  of  a 
merry  song  as  a  company  of  boys  and  girls  danced 
merrily  along. 

'  Flower  of  the  rose, 
If  I  've  been  happy,  what  matter  who  knows/ 

they  sang. 

It  was  all  too  tempting ;  out  he  must  get.  Filippo 
looked  round  his  room,  and  his  eye  rested  on  the 
bed.  With  a  shout  of  triumphant  delight  he  ran 
towards  it.  First  he  seized  the  quilt  and  tore  it 
into  strips,  then  the  blankets,  then  the  sheets. 

*  Whoever  saw  a  grander  rope  ? '  he  chuckled  to 
himself  as  he  knotted  the  ends  together. 

Quick  as  thought  he  tied  it  to  the  iron  bar  that 
ran  across  his  window,  and,  squeezing  out,  he  began 
to  climb  down,  hand  over  hand,  dangling  and 
swinging  to  and  fro.  The  rope  was  stout  and  good, 
and  now  he  could  steady  himself  by  catching  his 
toes  in  the  great  iron  rings  fastened  into  the  wall, 
until  at  last  he  dropped  breathless  into  the  street 
below. 

Next  day,  when  Cosimo  came  to  see  how  the 
painting  went  on,  he  saw  indeed  the  pictures  and 
the  brushes,  but  no  painter  was  there.  Quickly  he 
stepped  to  the  open  window,  and  there  he  saw  the 
dangling  rope  of  sheets,  and  guessed  at  once  how 
the  bird  had  flown. 

Through  the  streets  they  searched  for  the  missing 
painter,  and  before  long  he  was  found  and  brought 
back.  Filippo  tried  to  look  penitent,  but  his  eyes 


42  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

were  dancing  with  merriment,  and   Cosimo  must 
needs  laugh  too. 

*  After  all,'  said  Filippo,  '  my  talent  is  not  like  a 
beast  of  burden,  to  be  driven  and  beaten  into  doing 
its  work.     It  is  rather  like  one  of  those  heavenly 
visitors  whom   we   willingly   entertain    when  they 
deign  to  visit  us,  but  whom  we  can  never  force 
either  to  come  or  go  at  will.' 

'  Thou  art  right,  friend  painter,'  answered  the 
great  man.  '  And  when  I  think  how  thou  and  thy 
talent  might  have  taken  wings  together,  had  not 
the  rope  held  good,  I  vow  I  will  never  seek  to  keep 
thee  in  against  thy  will  again.' 

*  Then  will  I  work  all  the  more  willingly,'  answered 
Filippo. 

So  with  doors  open,  and  freedom  to  come  and  go, 
Filippo  no  longer  wished  to  escape,  but  worked  with 
all  his  heart.  The  beautiful  Madonna  and  angel 
were  soon  finished,  and  besides  he  painted  a  won- 
derful picture  of  seven  saints  with  St.  John  sitting 
hi  their  midst. 

From  far  and  near  came  requests  that  Fra  Filippo 
Lippi  should  paint  pictures  for  different  churches 
and  convents.  He  would  much  rather  have  painted 
the  scenes  and  the  people  he  saw  every  day,  but  he 
remembered  the  prior's  lecture,  and  still  painted 
only  the  stories  of  saints  and  holy  people — the 
gentle  Madonna  with  her  scarlet  book  of  prayers, 
the  dove  fluttering  near,  and  the  angel  messenger 
with  shining  wings  bearing  the  lily  branch.  True, 
the  saints  would  sometimes  look  out  of  his  pictures 
with  the  faces  of  some  of  his  friends,  but  no  one 


THE    ANNUNCIATION.      By  FILIPPO  LIPPI 

'The  Madonna  -with  the  dove  fluttering  near,  and  the  Angel  messenger 
bearing  the  lily  branch" 


ASTOR,    LEN 

<wD     FOUiM 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  43 

seemed  to  notice  that.  On  the  whole  his  was  a 
happy  life,  and  he  was  always  ready  to  paint  for 
any  one  that  should  ask  him. 

Many  people  now  were  proud  to  know  the  famous 
young  painter,  but  his  old  companion  Fra  Diamante 
was  still  the  friend  he  loved  best.  Whenever  it  was 
possible  they  still  would  work  together;  so,  great 
was  their  delight  when  one  day  an  order  came  from 
Prato  that  they  should  both  go  there  to  paint  the 
walls  of  San  Stefano. 

'  Good-bye  to  old  Florence  for  a  while,'  cried 
Filippo  as  they  set  out  merrily  together.  He 
looked  back  as  he  spoke  at  the  spires  and  sunbaked 
roofs,  the  white  marble  fa9ade  of  San  Miniato,  and 
the  dark  cypresses  standing  clear  against  the  pure 
warm  sky  of  early  spring.  *  I  am  weary  of  your 
great  men  and  all  your  pomp  and  splendour. 
Something  tells  me  we  shall  have  a  golden  time 
among  the  good  folk  of  Prato.' 

Perhaps  it  was  the  springtime  that  made  Filippo 
so  joyous  that  morning  as  he  rode  along  the  dusty 
white  road. 

Spring  had  come  with  a  glad  rush,  as  she  ever 
comes  in  Italy,  scattering  on  every  side  her  flowers 
and  favours.  From  under  the  dead  brown  leaves  of 
autumn,  violets  pushed  their  heads  and  perfumed  all 
the  air.  Under  the  grey  olives  the  sprouting  corn 
spread  its  tender  green,  and  the  scarlet  and  purple 
of  the  anemones  waved  spring's  banner  far  and  near. 
It  was  good  to  be  alive  on  such  a  day. 

Arrived  at  Prato,  the  two  painters,  with  a  favourite 
pupil  called  Botticelli,  worked  together  diligently, 


44  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

and  covered  wall  after  wall  with  their  frescoes. 
It  seemed  as  if  they  would  never  be  done,  for 
each  church  and  convent  had  work  awaiting 
them. 

'  Truly,'  said  Filippo  one  day  when  he  was  putting 
the  last  touches  to  a  portrait  of  Fra  Diamante,  whom 
he  had  painted  into  his  picture  of  the  death  of  St. 
Stephen, '  I  will  undertake  no  more  work  for  a  while. 
It  is  full  time  we  had  a  holiday  together.' 

But  even  as  he  spoke  a  message  was  brought  to 
him  from  the  good  abbess  of  the  convent  of  Santa 
Margherita,  begging  him  to  come  and  paint  an 
altarpiece  for  the  sisters'  chapel. 

'Ah,  well,  what  must  be,  must  be,'  he  said  to 
Fra  Diamante,  who  stood  smiling  by.  'I  will  do 
what  I  can  to  please  these  holy  women,  but  after 
that — no  more.' 

The  staid  and  sober  abbess  met  him  at  the  con- 
vent door,  and  silently  led  him  through  the  sunny 
garden,  bright  with  flowers,  where  the  lizards  darted 
to  right  and  left  as  they  walked  past  the  fountain 
and  entered  the  dim,  cool  chapel.  In  a  low,  sweet 
voice  she  told  him  what  they  would  have  him  paint, 
and  showed  him  the  space  above  the  high  altar 
where  the  picture  was  to  be  placed. 

'  Our  great  desire  is  that  thou  shouldst  paint  for 
us  the  Holy  Virgin  with  the  Blessed  Child  on  the 
night  of  the  Nativity,'  she  said. 

The  painter  seemed  to  listen,  but  his  attention 
wandered,  and  all  the  time  he  wished  himself  back 
in  the  sunny  garden,  where  he  had  seen  a  fair 
young  face  looking  through  the  pink  sprays  of 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  45 

almond  blossoms,  while  the  music  of  the  vesper 
hymn  sounded  sweet  and  clear  in  his  ears. 

« 1  will  begin  to-morrow,'  he  said  with  a  start 
when  the  low  voice  of  the  abbess  stopped.  '  I  will 
paint  the  Madonna  and  Babe  as  thou  desirest.' 

So  next  day  the  work  began.  And  each  time 
the  abbess  noiselessly  entered  the  room  where  the 
painter  was  at  work  and  watched  the  picture  grow 
beneath  his  hand,  she  felt  more  and  more  sure  that 
she  had  done  right  in  asking  this  painter  to  decorate 
their  beloved  chapel. 

True,  it  was  said  by  many  that  the  young  artist 
was  but  a  worldly  minded  man,  not  like  the  blessed 
Fra  Angelico,  the  heavenly  painter  of  San  Marco ; 
but  his  work  was  truly  wonderful,  and  his  handsome 
face  looked  good,  even  if  a  somewhat  merry  smile 
was  ever  wont  to  lurk  about  his  mouth  and  in  his 
eyes. 

Then  came  a  morning  when  the  abbess  found 
Filippo  standing  idle,  with  a  discontented  look  upon 
his  face.  He  was  gazing  at  the  unfinished  picture, 
and  for  a  while  he  did  not  see  that  any  one  had 
entered  the  room. 

*  Is  aught  amiss  ? '  asked  the  gentle  voice  at  his 
side,  and  Filippo  turned  and  saw  the  abbess. 

'  Something  indeed  seems  amiss  with  my  five 
fingers,'  said  Filippo,  with  his  quick  bright  smile. 
'  Time  after  time  have  I  tried  to  paint  the  face  of 
the  Madonna,  and  each  time  I  must  needs  paint  it 
out  again.' 

Then  a  happy  thought  came  into  his  mind. 

*  I  have  seen  a  face  sometimes  as  I  passed  through 


46  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  convent  garden  which  is  exactly  what  I  want,'  he 
cried.  '  If  thou  wouldst  but  let  the  maiden  sit  where 
I  can  see  her  for  a  few  hours  each  day,  I  can  promise 
thee  that  the  Madonna  will  be  finished  as  thou 
Avouldst  wish.' 

The  abbess  stood  in  deep  thought  for  a  few 
minutes,  for  she  was  puzzled  to  know  what  she 
should  do. 

*  It  is  the  child  Lucrezia,'  she  thought  to  herself. 
'  She  who  was  sent  here  by  her  father,  the  noble 
Buti  of  Florence.  She  is  but  a  novice  still,  and  there 
can  be  no  harm  in  allowing  her  to  lend  her  fair  face 
as  a  model  for  Our  Lady.' 

So  she  told  Filippo  it  should  be  as  he  wished. 

It  was  dull  in  the  convent,  and  Lucrezia  was  only 
too  pleased  to  spend  some  hours  every  morning, 
idly  sitting  in  the  great  chair,  while  the  young 
painter  talked  to  her  and  told  her  stories  while  he 
painted.  She  counted  the  hours  until  it  was  time  to 
go  back,  and  grew  happier  each  day  as  the  Madonna's 
face  grew  more  and  more  beautiful. 

Surely  there  was  no  one  so  good  or  so  handsome 
as  this  wonderful  artist.  Lucrezia  could  not  bear  to 
think  how  dull  her  life  would  be  when  he  was  gone. 
Then  one  day,  when  it  happened  that  the  abbess 
was  called  away  and  they  were  alone,  Filippo  told 
Lucrezia  that  he  loved  her  and  could  not  live  without 
her;  and  although  she  was  frightened  at  first,  she 
soon  grew  happy,  and  told  him  that  she  was  ready  to 
go  with  him  wherever  he  wished.  But  what  would 
the  good  nuns  think  of  it  ?  Would  they  ever  let 
her  go  ?  No ;  they  must  think  of  some  other  plan. 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  47 

To-morrow  was  the  great  festa  of  Prato,  when  all 
the  nuns  walked  in  procession  to  see  the  holy  centola, 
or  girdle,  which  the  Madonna  had  given  to  St.  Thomas. 
Lucrezia  must  take  care  to  walk  on  the  outside  of 
the  procession,  and  to  watch  for  a  touch  upon  the 
arm  as  she  passed. 

The  festa  day  dawned  bright  and  clear,  and  all 
Prato  was  early  astir.  Procession  after  procession 
wound  its  way  to  the  church  where  the  relic  was  to 
be  shown,  and  the  crowd  grew  denser  every  moment. 
Presently  came  the  nuns  of  Santa  Margherita.  A 
figure  in  the  crowd  pressed  nearer.  Lucrezia  felt  a 
touch  upon  her  arm,  and  a  strong  hand  clasped  hers. 
The  crowd  swayed  to  and  fro,  and  in  an  instant  the 
two  figures  disappeared.  No  one  noticed  that  the 
young  novice  was  gone,  and  before  the  nuns  thought 
of  looking  for  their  charge  Lucrezia  was  on  her  way 
to  Florence,  her  horse  led  by  the  painter  whom  she 
loved,  while  his  good  friend  Fra  Diamante  rode 
beside  her. 

Then  the  storm  burst.  Lucrezia's  father  was 
furious,  the  good  nuns  were  dismayed,  and  every 
one  shook  their  heads  over  this  last  adventure  of 
the  Florentine  painter. 

But  luckily  for  Filippo,  the  great  Cosimo  still 
stood  his  friend  and  helped  him  through  it  all.  He 
it  was  who  begged  the  Pope  to  allow  Fra  Filippo  to 
marry  Lucrezia  (for  monks,  of  course,  were  never 
allowed  to  many),  and  the  Pope,  too,  was  kind  and 
granted  the  request,  so  that  all  went  well. 

Now  indeed  was  Lucrezia  as  happy  as  the  day 
was  long,  and  when  the  spring  returned  once  more 


48  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

to  Florence,  a  baby  Filippo  came  with  the  violets 
and  lilies. 

*  How  wilt  thou  know  us  apart  if  thou  callest  him 
Filippo  ? '  asked  the  proud  father. 

'  Ah,  he  is  such  a  little  one,  dear  heart,'  Lucrezia 
answered  gaily.  '  We  will  call  him  Filippino,  and 
then  there  can  be  no  mistake.' 

There  was  no  more  need  now  to  seek  for  pleasures 
out  of  doors.  Filippo  painted  his  pictures  and  lived 
his  happy  home  life  without  seeking  any  more 
adventures.  His  Madonnas  grew  ever  more  beauti- 
ful, for  they  were  all  touched  with  the  beauty  that 
shone  from  Lucrezia's  fair  face,  and  the  Infant  Christ 
had  ever  the  smile  and  the  curly  golden  hair  of  the 
baby  Filippino. 

And  by  and  by  a  little  daughter  came  to  gladden 
their  hearts,  and  then  indeed  their  cup  of  joy  was  full. 

'  What  name  shall  we  give  the  little  maid  ? '  said 
Filippo. 

'  Methought  thou  wouldst  have  it  Lucrezia,'  an- 
swered the  mother. 

*  There  is  but  one  Lucrezia  in  ah1  the  world  for 
me,'  he  said.     '  None  other  but  thee  shall  bear  that 
name.' 

As  they  talked  a  knock  sounded  at  the  door,  and 
presently  the  favourite  pupil,  Sandro,  looked  in. 
There  was  a  shout  of  joy  from  little  Filippino,  and 
the  young  man  lifted  the  child  in  his  arms  and 
smiled  with  the  look  of  one  who  loves  children. 

*  Come,  Sandro,  and  see  the  little  new  flower,'  said 
Filippo.     *  Is  she  not  as  fair  as  the  roses  which  thou 
dost  so  love  to  paint  ? ' 


THE    NATIVITY.      By    FILIPPO    LIPPI 
"  His  Madonnas  grew  ever  more  beautiful ' 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  49 

Then,  as  the  young  man  looked  with  interest 
at  the  tiny  face,  Filippo  clapped  him  on  the 
shoulder. 

1 1  have  it ! '  he  cried.  '  She  shall  be  called  after 
thee,  Alessandra.  Some  day  she  will  be  proud  to 
think  that  she  bears  thy  name.' 

For  already  Filippo  knew  that  this  pupil  of  his 
would  ere  long  wake  the  world  to  new  wonder. 

The  only  clouds  that  hid  the  sunshine  of  Lucrezia's 
life  was  when  Filippo  was  obliged  to  leave  her  for  a 
while  and  paint  his  pictures  in  other  towns.  She 
always  grew  sad  when  his  work  in  Florence  drew 
to  a  close,  for  she  never  knew  where  his  next  work 
might  lie. 

'  Well,'  said  Filippo  one  night  as  he  returned 
home  and  caught  up  little  Filippino  in  his  arms, 
'  the  picture  for  the  nuns  of  San  Ambrogio  is  finished 
at  last  1  Truly  they  have  saints  and  angels  enough 
this  time — rows  upon  rows  of  sweet  faces  and  white 
lilies.  And  the  sweetest  face  of  all  is  thine,  Saint 
Lucy,  kneeling  in  front  with  thy  hand  beneath  the 
chin  of  this  young  cherub.' 

*  Is  it  indeed  finished  so  soon  ? '  asked  Lucrezia,  a 
wistful  note  creeping  into  her  voice. 

'  Ay,  and  to-morrow  I  must  away  to  Spoleto  to 
begin  my  work  at  the  Chapel  of  Our  Lady.  But 
look  not  so  sad,  dear  heart ;  before  three  months  are 
past,  by  the  time  the  grapes  are  gathered,  I  will 
return.' 

But  it  was  sad  work  parting,  though  it  might  only 
be  for  three  months,  and  even  her  little  son  could  not 
make  his  mother  smile,  though  he  drew  wonderful 

D 


50  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

pictures  for  her  of  birds  and  beasts,  and  told  her  he 
meant  to  be  a  great  painter  like  his  father  when 
he  grew  up. 

Next  day  Filippo  started,  and  with  him  went  his 
good  friend  Fra  Diamante. 

*  Fare  thee  well,  Filippo.     Take  good  care  of  him, 
friend  Diamante,'   cried    Lucrezia ;    and  she  stood 
watching  until  their  figures  disappeared  at  the  end 
of  the  long  white  road,  and  then  went  inside  to  wait 
patiently  for  their  return. 

The  summer  days  passed  slowly  by.  The  cheeks 
of  the  peaches  grew  soft  and  pink  under  the  kiss  of 
the  sun,  the  figs  showed  ripe  and  purple  beneath  the 
green  leaves,  and  the  grapes  hung  in  great  trans- 
parent clusters  of  purple  and  gold  from  the  vines 
that  swung  between  the  poplar-trees.  Then  came 
the  merry  days  of  vintage,  and  the  juice  was  pressed 
out  of  the  ripe  grapes. 

'  Now  he  will  come  back,'  said  Lucrezia,  '  for  he 
said  "by  the  time  the  grapes  are  gathered  I  will 
return." 

The  days  went  slowly  by,  and  every  evening  she 
stood  in  the  loggia  and  gazed  across  the  hills.  Then 
she  would  point  out  the  long  white  road  to  little 
Filippino. 

*  Thy  father  will  come  along  that  road  ere  long,' 
she  said,  and  joy  sang  in  her  voice. 

Then  one  evening  as  she  watched  as  usual  her 
heart  beat  quickly.  Surely  that  figure  riding  so 
slowly  along  was  Fra  Diamante  ?  But  where  was 
Filippo,  and  why  did  his  friend  ride  so  slowly  ? 

When  he  came  near  and  entered  the  house  she 


FRA  FILIPPO  LIPPI  51 

looked  into  his  face,  and  all  the  joy  faded  from  her 
eyes. 

*  You  need  not  tell  me,'  she  cried ;  '  I  know  that 
Filippo  is  dead.' 

It  was  but  too  true.  The  faithful  friend  had 
brought  the  sad  news  himself.  No  one  could  tell 
how  Filippo  had  died.  A  few  short  hours  of  pain 
and  then  all  was  over.  Some  talked  of  poison.  But 
who  could  tell  ? 

There  had  just  been  time  to  send  his  farewell  to 
Lucrezia,  and  to  pray  his  friend  to  take  charge  of 
little  Filippino. 

So,  as  she  listened,  joy  died  out  of  Lucrezia's  life. 
Spring  might  come  again,  and  summer  sunshine 
make  others  glad,  but  for  her  it  would  be  ever  cold, 
bleak  winter.  For  never  more  should  her  heart  grow 
warm  in  the  sunshine  of  Filippo's  smile — that  sun- 
shine which  had  made  every  one  love  him,  in  spite 
of  his  faults,  ever  since  he  ran  about  the  streets, 
a  little  ragged  boy,  in  the  old  city  of  Florence. 


SANDRO  BOTTICELLI 

WE  must  now  go  back  to  the  days  when  Fra 
Filippo  Lippi  painted  his  pictures  and  so  brought 
fame  to  the  Carmine  Convent. 

There  was  at  that  time  in  Florence  a  good  citizen 
called  Mariano  Filipepi,  an  honest,  well-to-do  man, 
who  had  several  sons.  These  sons  were  all  taught 
carefully  and  well  trained  to  do  each  the  work  he 
chose.  But  the  fourth  son,  Alessandro,  or  Sandro 
as  he  was  called,  was  a  great  trial  to  his  father.  He 
would  settle  to  no  trade  or  calling.  Restless  and 
uncertain,  he  turned  from  one  thing  to  another. 
At  one  time  he  would  work  with  all  his  might,  and 
then  again  become  as  idle  and  fitful  as  the  summer 
breeze.  He  could  learn  well  and  quickly  when  he 
chose,  but  then  there  were  so  few  things  that  he 
did  choose  to  learn.  Music  he  loved,  and  he  knew 
every  song  of  the  birds,  and  anything  connected 
with  flowers  was  a  special  joy  to  him.  No  one 
knew  better  than  he  how  the  different  kinds  of 
roses  grew,  and  how  the  lilies  hung  upon  their 
stalks. 

*  And  what,  I  should  like  to  know,  is  going  to  be 
the  use  of  all  this,'  the  good  father  would  say  im- 
patiently, *  as  long  as  thou  takest  no  pains  to  read 
and  write  and  do  thy  sums  ?  What  am  I  to  do 
with  such  a  boy,  I  wonder  ? ' 


SANDRO  BOTTICELLI  53 

Then  in  despair  the  poor  man  decided  to  send 
Sandro  to  a  neighbour's  workshop,  to  see  if  perhaps 
his  hands  would  work  better  than  his  head. 

The  name  of  this  neighbour  was  Botticelli,  and 
he  was  a  goldsmith,  and  a  very  excellent  master  of 
his  art.  He  agreed  to  receive  Sandro  as  his  pupil, 
so  it  happened  that  the  boy  was  called  by  his 
master's  name,  and  was  known  ever  after  as  Sandro 
Botticelli. 

Sandro  worked  for  some  time  with  his  master,  and 
quickly  learned  to  draw  designs  for  the  goldsmith's 
work. 

In  those  days  painters  and  goldsmiths  worked  a 
great  deal  together,  and  Sandro  often  saw  designs 
for  pictures  and  listened  to  the  talk  of  the  artists 
who  came  to  his  master's  shop.  Gradually,  as  he 
looked  and  listened,  his  mind  was  made  up.  He 
would  become  a  painter.  All  his  restless  longings 
and  day  dreams  turned  to  this.  All  the  music  that 
floated  in  the  air  as  he  listened  to  the  birds'  song, 
the  gentle  dancing  motion  of  the  wind  among  the 
trees,  all  the  colours  of  the  flowers,  and  the  graceful 
twinings  of  the  rose-stems — all  these  he  would  catch 
and  weave  into  his  pictures.  Yes,  he  would  learn 
to  paint  music  and  motion,  and  then  he  would  be 
happy. 

*  So  now  thou  wilt  become  a  painter,'  said  his 
father,  with  a  hopeless  sigh. 

Truly  this  boy  was  more  trouble  than  all  the  rest 
put  together.  Here  he  had  just  settled  down  to 
learn  how  to  become  a  good  goldsmith,  and  now  he 
wished  to  try  his  hand  at  something  else.  Well,  it 


54  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

was  no  use  saying  'no.'  The  boy  could  never  be 
made  to  do  anything  but  what  he  wished.  There  was 
the  Carmelite  monk  Fra  Filippo  Lippi,  of  whom  all 
men  were  talking.  It  was  said  he  was  the  greatest 
painter  in  Florence.  The  boy  should  have  the  best 
teaching  it  was  possible  to  give  him,  and  perhaps 
this  time  he  would  stick  to  his  work. 

So  Sandro  was  sent  as  a  pupil  to  Fra  Filippo,  and 
he  soon  became  a  great  favourite  with  the  happy, 
sunny-tempered  master.  The  quick  eye  of  the 
painter  soon  saw  that  this  was  no  ordinary  pupil. 
There  was  something  about  Sandro's  drawing  that 
was  different  to  anything  that  Filippo  had  ever  seen 
before.  His  figures  seemed  to  move,  and  one 
almost  heard  the  wind  rustling  in  their  flowing 
drapery.  Instead  of  walking,  they  seemed  to  be 
dancing  lightly  along  with  a  swaying  motion  as  if  to 
the  rhythm  of  music.  The  very  rose-leaves  the  boy 
loved  to  paint,  seemed  to  flutter  down  to  the  sound 
of  a  fairy  song.  Filippo  was  proud  of  his  pupil. 

'  The  world  will  one  day  hear  more  of  my  Sandro 
Botticelli,'  he  said ;  and,  young  though  the  boy  was, 
he  often  took  him  to  different  places  to  help  him  in 
his  work. 

So  it  happened  that,  in  that  wonderful  spring 
of  Filippo's  life,  Sandro  too  was  at  Prato,  and 
worked  there  with  Fra  Diamante.  And  in  after 
years  when  the  master's  little  daughter  was  born, 
she  was  named  Alessandra,  after  the  favourite 
pupil,  to  whom  was  also  left  the  training  of  little 
Filippino. 

Now,   indeed,    Sandro's  good  old  father  had  no 


THE    ANGEL,    FROM    TOBIAS    AND    THE    ANGEL.      By    BOTTICELLI 
"  His  flgrures  seemed  to  move  as  if  to  the  rhythm  of  music" 


ONS, 


SANDRO  BOTTICELLI  55 

further  cause  to  complain.  The  boy  had  found  the 
work  he  was  most  fitted  for,  and  his  name  soon 
became  famous  in  Florence. 

It  was  the  reign  of  gaiety  and  pleasure  in  the  city 
of  Florence  at  that  time.  Lorenzo  the  Magnificent, 
the  son  of  Cosimo  de  Medici,  was  ruler  now,  and 
his  court  was  the  centre  of  all  that  was  most  splendid 
and  beautiful.  Rich  dresses,  dainty  food,  music, 
gay  revels,  everything  that  could  give  pleasure, 
whether  good  or  bad,  was  there. 

Lorenzo,  like  his  father,  was  always  glad  to  dis- 
cover a  new  painter,  and  Botticelli  soon  became  a 
great  favourite  at  court. 

But  pictures  of  saints  and  angels  were  somewhat 
out  of  fashion  at  that  time,  for  people  did  not  care 
to  be  reminded  of  anything  but  earthly  pleasures. 
So  Botticelli  chose  his  subjects  to  please  the  court, 
and  for  a  while  ceased  to  paint  his  sad-eyed  Madonnas. 

What  mattered  to  him  what  his  subject  was  ? 
Let  him  but  paint  his  dancing  figures,  tripping 
along  in  their  light  flowing  garments,  keeping  time 
to  the  music  of  his  thoughts,  and  the  subject  might 
be  one  of  the  old  Greek  tales  or  any  other  story 
that  served  his  purpose. 

All  the  gay  court  dresses,  the  rich  quaint  robes  of 
the  fair  ladies,  helped  to  train  the  young  painter's 
fancy  for  flowing  draperies  and  wonderful  veils  of 
filmy  transparent  gauze. 

There  was  one  fair  lady  especially  whom  Sandro 
loved  to  paint — the  beautiful  Simonetta,  as  she  is 
still  called. 

First  he  painted  her  as  Venus,  who  was  born  of 


56  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  sea  foam.  In  his  picture  she  floats  to  the  shore 
standing  in  a  shell,  her  golden  hair  wrapped  round 
her.  The  winds  behind  blow  her  onward  and 
scatter  pink  and  red  roses  through  the  air.  On  the 
shore  stands  Spring,  who  holds  out  a  mantle,  flowers 
nestling  in  its  folds,  ready  to  enwrap  the  goddess 
when  the  winds  shall  have  wafted  her  to  land. 

Then  again  we  see  her  in  his  wonderful  picture 
of '  Spring,'  and  in  another  called  '  Mars  and  Venus.' 
She  was  too  great  a  lady  to  stoop  to  the  humble 
painter,  and  he  perhaps  only  looked  up  to  her  as  a 
star  shining  in  heaven,  far  out  of  the  reach  of  his 
love.  But  he  never  ceased  to  worship  her  from  afar. 
He  never  married  or  cared  for  any  other  fair  face,  just 
as  the  great  poet  Dante,  whom  Botticelli  admired 
so  much,  dreamed  only  of  his  one  love,  Beatrice. 

But  Sandro  did  not  go  sadly  through  life  sighing 
for  what  could  never  be  his.  He  was  kindly  and 
good-natured,  full  of  jokes,  and  ready  to  make  merry 
with  his  pupils  in  the  workshop. 

It  once  happened  that  one  of  these  pupils,  Biagio 
by  name,  had  made  a  copy  of  one  of  Sandro's 
pictures,  a  beautiful  Madonna  surrounded  by  eight 
angels.  This  he  was  very  anxious  to  sell,  and  the 
master  kindly  promised  to  help  him,  and  in  the  end 
arranged  the  matter  with  a  citizen  of  Florence,  who 
offered  to  buy  it  for  six  gold  pieces. 

'  Well,  Biagio,'  said  Sandro,  when  his  pupil  came 
into  the  studio  next  morning,  'I  have  sold  thy 
picture.  Let  us  now  hang  it  up  in  a  good  light 
that  the  man  who  wishes  to  buy  it  may  see  it  at  its 
best.  Then  will  he  pay  thee  the  money.' 


SANDRO  BOTTICELLI  57 

Biagio  was  overjoyed. 

'  Oh,  master,'  he  cried,  '  how  well  thou  hast  done.' 

Then  with  hands  which  trembled  with  excitement 
the  pupil  arranged  the  picture  in  the  best  light,  and 
went  to  fetch  the  purchaser. 

Now  meanwhile  Botticelli  and  his  other  pupils 
had  made  eight  caps  of  scarlet  pasteboard  such  as 
the  citizens  of  Florence  then  wore,  and  these  they 
fastened  with  wax  on  to  the  heads  of  the  eight 
angels  in  the  picture. 

Presently  Biagio  came  back  panting  with  joyful 
excitement,  and  brought  with  him  the  citizen,  who 
knew  already  of  the  joke.  The  poor  boy  looked  at 
his  picture  and  then  rubbed  his  eyes.  What  had 
happened?  Where  were  his  angels?  The  picture 
must  be  bewitched,  for  instead  of  his  angels  he  saw 
only  eight  citizens  in  scarlet  caps. 

He  looked  wildly  around,  and  then  at  the  face 
of  the  man  who  had  promised  to  buy  the  picture. 
Of  course  he  would  refuse  to  take  such  a  thing. 

But,  to  his  surprise,  the  citizen  looked  well  pleased, 
and  even  praised  the  work. 

'  It  is  well  worth  the  money,'  he  said  ;  *  and  if  thou 
wilt  return  with  me  to  my  house,  I  will  pay  thee  the 
six  gold  pieces.' 

Biagio  scarcely  knew  what  to  do.  He  was  so 
puzzled  and  bewildered  he  felt  as  if  this  must  be  a 
bad  dream. 

As  soon  as  he  could,  he  rushed  back  to  the  studio 
to  look  again  at  that  picture,  and  then  he  found 
that  the  red-capped  citizens  had  disappeared,  and  his 
eight  angels  were  there  instead.  This  of  course  was 


53  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

not  surprising,  as  Sandro  and  his  pupils  had  quickly 
removed  the  wax  and  taken  off  the  scarlet  caps. 

*  Master,  master,'  cried  the  astonished  pupil,  '  tell 
me  if  I  am  dreaming,  or  if  I  have  lost  my  wits  ? 
When  I  came  in  just  now,  these  angels  were 
Florentine  citizens  with  red  caps  on  their  heads,  and 
now  they  are  angels  once  more.  What  may  this 
mean  ? ' 

'  I  think,  Biagio,  that  this  money  must  have 
turned  thy  brain  round,'  said  Botticelli  gravely.  *  If 
the  angels  had  looked  as  thou  sayest,  dost  thou 
think  the  citizen  would  have  bought  the  picture  ?  * 

'That  is  true,'  said  Biagio,  shaking  his  head 
solemnly ;  *  and  yet  I  swear  I  never  saw  anything 
more  clearly.' 

And  the  poor  boy,  for  many  a  long  day,  was 
afraid  to  trust  his  own  eyes,  since  they  had  so 
basely  deceived  him. 

But  the  next  thing  that  happened  at  the  studio 
did  not  seem  like  a  joke  to  the  master,  for  a  weaver 
of  cloth  came  to  live  close  by,  and  his  looms  made 
such  a  noise  and  such  a  shaking  that  Sandro  was 
deafened,  and  the  house  shook  so  greatly  that  it  was 
impossible  to  paint. 

But  though  Botticelli  went  to  the  weaver  and 
explained  all  this  most  courteously,  the  man 
answered  roughly,  *  Can  I  not  do  what  I  like  with 
my  own  house  ? '  So  Sandro  was  angry,  and  went 
away  and  immediately  ordered  a  great  square  of 
stone  to  be  brought,  so  big  that  it  filled  a  waggon. 
This  he  had  placed  on  the  top  of  his  wall  nearest  to 
the  weaver's  house,  in  such  a  way  that  the  least 


SANDRO  BOTTICELLI  59 

shake  would  bring  it  crashing  down  into  the  enemy's 
workshop. 

When  the  weaver  saw  this  he  was  terrified,  and 
came  round  at  once  to  the  studio. 

'  Take  down  that  great  stone  at  once,'  he  shouted. 
'  Do  you  not  see  that  it  would  crush  me  and  my 
workshop  if  it  fell  ? ' 

«  Not  at  all,'  said  Botticelli.  '  Why  should  I  take 
it  down?  Can  I  not  do  as  I  like  with  my  own 
house  ? ' 

And  this  taught  the  weaver  a  lesson,  so  that  he 
made  less  noise  and  shaking,  and  Sandro  had  the 
best  of  the  joke  after  all. 

There  were  no  idle  days  of  dreaming  now  for 
Sandro.  As  soon  as  one  picture  was  finished 
another  was  wanted.  Money  flowed  in,  and  his 
purse  was  always  full  of  gold,  though  he  emptied  it 
almost  as  fast  as  it  was  filled.  His  work  for  the 
Pope  at  Rome  alone  was  so  well  paid  that  the 
money  should  have  lasted  him  for  many  a  long  day, 
but  in  his  usual  careless  way  he  spent  it  all  before 
he  returned  to  Florence. 

Perhaps  it  was  the  gay  life  at  Lorenzo's  splendid 
court  that  had  taught  him  to  spend  money  so  care- 
lessly, and  to  have  no  thought  but  to  eat,  drink,  and 
be  merry.  But  very  soon  a  change  began  to  steal 
over  his  life. 

There  was  one  man  in  Florence  who  looked  with 
sad  condemning  eyes  on  all  the  pleasure-loving 
crowd  that  thronged  the  court  of  Lorenzo  the 
Magnificent.  In  the  peaceful  convent  of  San 
Marco,  whose  walls  the  angel-painter  had  covered 


60  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

with  pictures  *  like  windows  into  heaven,'  the 
stern  monk  Savonarola  was  grieving  over  the  sin 
and  vanity  that  went  on  around  him.  He  loved 
Florence  with  all  his  heart,  and  he  could  not  bear 
the  thought  that  she  was  forgetting,  in  the  whirl  of 
pleasure,  all  that  was  good  and  pure  and  worth  the 
winning. 

Then,  like  a  battle-cry,  his  voice  sounded  through 
the  city,  and  roused  the  people  from  their  foolish 
dreams  of  ease  and  pleasure.  Every  one  flocked  to 
the  great  cathedral  to  hear  Savonarola  preach,  and 
Sandro  Botticelli  left  for  a  while  his  studio  and  his 
painting  and  became  a  follower  of  the  great  preacher. 
Never  again  did  he  paint  those  pictures  of  earthly 
subjects  which  had  so  delighted  Lorenzo.  When  he 
once  more  returned  to  his  work,  it  was  to  paint  his 
sad-eyed  Madonnas  ;  and  the  music  which  still  floated 
through  his  visions  was  now  like  the  song  of  angels. 

The  boys  of  Florence  especially  had  grown  wild 
and  rough  during  the  reign  of  pleasure,  and  they 
were  the  terror  of  the  city  during  carnival  time. 
They  would  carry  long  poles,  or  '  stili,'  and  bar  the 
streets  across,  demanding  money  before  they  would 
let  the  people  pass.  This  money  they  spent  on 
drinking  and  feasting,  and  at  night  they  set  up 
great  trees  in  the  squares  or  wider  streets  and 
lighted  huge  bonfires  around  them.  Then  would 
begin  a  terrible  fight  with  stones,  and  many  of  the 
boys  were  hurt,  and  some  even  killed. 

No  one  had  been  able  to  put  a  stop  to  this  until 
Savonarola  made  up  his  mind  that  it  should  cease. 
Then,  as  if  by  magic,  all  was  changed. 


SANDRO  BOTTICELLI  61 

Instead  of  the  rough  game  of  '  stili,'  there  were 
altars  put  up  at  the  corners  of  the  streets,  and  the 
boys  begged  money  of  the  passers-by,  not  for  their 
feasts,  but  for  the  poor. 

'You  shall  not  miss  your  bonfire,'  said  Savonarola ; 
'  but  instead  of  a  tree  you  shall  burn  up  vain  and 
useless  things,  and  so  purify  the  city.' 

So  the  children  went  round  and  collected  all  the 
'  vanities,'  as  they  were  called — wigs  and  masks  and 
carnival  dresses,  foolish  songs,  bad  books,  and  evil 
pictures ;  all  were  heaped  high  and  then  lighted  to 
make  one  great  bonfire. 

Some  people  think  that  perhaps  Sandro  threw 
into  the  Bonfire  of  Vanities  some  of  his  own  beauti- 
ful pictures,  but  that  we  cannot  tell. 

Then  came  the  sad  time  when  the  people,  who  at 
one  time  would  have  made  Savonarola  their  king, 
turned  against  him,  in  the  same  fickle  way  that 
crowds  will  ever  turn.  And  then  the  great  preacher, 
who  had  spent  his  life  trying  to  help  and  teach  them, 
and  to  do  them  good,  was  burned  in  the  great 
square  of  that  city  which  he  had  loved  so  dearly. 

After  this  it  was  long  before  Botticelli  cared  to 
paint  again.  He  was  old  and  weary  now,  poor  and 
sad,  sick  of  that  world  which  had  treated  with  such 
cruelty  the  master  whom  he  loved. 

One  last  picture  he  painted  to  show  the  triumph 
of  good  over  evil.  Not  with  the  sword  or  the  might 
of  great  power  is  the  triumph  won,  says  Sandro  to 
us  by  this  picture,  but  by  the  little  hand  of  the 
Christ  Child,  conquering  by  love  and  drawing  all 
men  to  Him.  This  Adoration  of  the  Magi  is  in 


62  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

our  own  National  Gallery  in  London,  and  is  the 
only  painting  which  Botticelli  ever  signed. 

*  I,  Alessandro,  painted  this  picture  during  the 
troubles  of  Italy  .  .  .  when  the  devil  was  let  loose 
for  the  space  of  three  and  a  half  years.     Afterwards 
shall  he  be  chained,  and  we  shall  see  him  trodden 
down  as  in  this  picture.' 

It  is  evident  that  Botticelli  meant  by  this  those 
sad  years  of  struggle  against  evil  which  ended  in 
the  martyrdom  of  the  great  preacher,  and  he  has 
placed  Savonarola  among  the  crowd  of  worshippers 
drawn  to  His  feet  by  the  Infant  Christ. 

It  is  sad  to  think  of  those  last  days  when  Sandro 
was  too  old  and  too  weary  to  paint.  He  who  had 
loved  to  make  his  figures  move  with  dancing  feet,  was 
now  obliged  to  walk  with  crutches.  The  roses  and 
lilies  of  spring  were  faded  now,  and  instead  of  the 
music  of  his  youth  he  heard  only  the  sound  of  harsh, 
ungrateful  voices,  in  the  flowerless  days  of  poverty 
and  old  age. 

There  is  always  something  sad  too  about  his 
pictures,  but  through  the  sadness,  if  we  listen,  we 
may  hear  the  angel-song,  and  understand  it  better  if 
we  have  in  our  minds  the  prayer  which  Botticelli 
left  for  us. 

*  Oh,   King  of  Kings    and  Lord  of  Lords,  who 
alone  rulest  always  in  eternity,  and  who  correctest 
all  our  wanderings,  giver  of  melody  to  the  choir 
of  angels,  listen  Thou  a  little  to  our  bitter  grief,  and 
come  and  rule  us,  oh  Thou  highest  King,  with  Thy 
love  which  is  so  sweet.' 


DOMENICO  GHIRLANDAIO 

GHIRLANDAIO  !  what  a  difficult  name  that  sounds  to 
our  English  ears.  But  it  has  a  very  simple  mean- 
ing, and  when  you  understand  it  the  difficulty  will 
vanish. 

It  all  happened  in  this  way.  Domenico's  father 
was  a  goldsmith,  one  of  the  cleverest  goldsmiths 
in  Florence,  and  he  was  specially  famous  for  making 
garlands  or  wreaths  of  gold  and  silver.  It  was  the 
fashion  then  for  the  young  maidens  of  Florence  to 
wear  these  garlands,  or  '  ghirlande '  as  they  were 
called,  on  their  heads,  and  because  this  goldsmith 
made  them  better  than  any  one  else  they  gave  him 
the  name  of  Ghirlandaio,  which  means  *  maker  of 
garlands,'  and  that  became  the  family  name. 

When  the  time  came  for  the  boy  Domenico  to 
learn  a  trade,  he  was  sent,  of  course,  to  his  father's 
workshop.  He  learned  so  quickly,  and  worked  with 
such  strong,  clever  fingers,  that  his  father  was 
delighted. 

*  The  boy  will  make  the  finest  goldsmith  of  his 
day,'  he  said  proudly,  as  he  watched  him  twisting 
the  delicate  golden  wire  and  working  out  his  designs 
in  beaten  silver. 

So  he  was  set  to  make  the  garlands,  and  for  a  while 
he  was  contented  and  happy.  It  was  such  exquisite 


63 


64  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

work  to  twine  into  shape  the  graceful  golden  leaves, 
with  here  and  there  a  silver  lily  or  a  jewelled  rose, 
and  to  dream  of  the  fair  head  on  which  the  garland 
would  rest. 

But  the  making  of  garlands  did  not  satisfy 
Domenico  for  long,  and  like  Botticelli  he  soon 
began  to  dream  of  becoming  a  painter. 

You  must  remember  that  in  those  days  goldsmiths 
and  painters  had  much  in  common,  and  often  worked 
together.  The  goldsmith  made  his  picture  with 
gold  and  silver  and  jewels,  while  the  painter  drew 
his  with  colours,  but  they  were  both  artists. 

So  as  the  young  Ghirlandaio  watched  these  men 
draw  their  great  designs  and  listened  to  their  talk, 
he  began  to  feel  that  the  goldsmith's  work  was 
cramped  and  narrow,  and  he  longed  for  a  larger, 
grander  work.  Day  by  day  the  garlands  were  more 
and  more  neglected,  and  every  spare  moment  was 
spent  drawing  the  faces  of  those  who  came  to  the 
shop,  or  even  those  of  the  passers-by. 

But  although,  ere  long,  Ghirlandaio  left  his 
father's  shop  and  learned  to  make  pictures  with 
colours,  instead  of  with  gold,  silver,  and  jewels,  still 
the  training  he  had  received  in  his  goldsmith's  work 
showed  to  the  end  in  all  his  pictures.  He  painted 
the  smallest  things  with  extreme  care,  and  was 
never  tired  of  spreading  them  over  with  delicate 
ornaments  and  decorations.  It  is  a  great  deal  the 
outward  show  with  Ghirlandaio,  and  not  so  much 
the  inward  soul,  that  we  find  in  his  pictures,  though 
he  had  a  wonderful  gift  of  painting  portraits. 

These  portraits  painted  by  the  young  Ghirlandaio 


DOMENICO  GHIRLANDAIO  65 

seemed  very  wonderful  to  the  admiring  Florentines. 
From  all  his  pictures  looked  out  faces  which  they 
knew  and  recognised  immediately.  There,  in  a 
group  of  saints,  or  in  a  crowd  of  figures  around  the 
Infant  Christ,  they  saw  the  well-known  faces  of 
Florentine  nobles,  the  great  ladies  from  the  palaces, 
ay,  and  even  the  men  of  the  market-place,  and  the 
poor  peasant  women  who  sold  eggs  and  vegetables 
in  the  streets.  Once  he  painted  an  old  bishop  with 
a  pair  of  spectacles  resting  on  his  nose.  It  was  the 
first  time  that  spectacles  had  ever  been  put  into  a 
picture. 

Then  off  he  must  go  to  Rome,  like  every  one  else, 
to  add  his  share  to  the  famous  frescoes  of  the 
Vatican.  But  it  was  in  Florence  that  most  of  his 
work  was  done. 

In  the  church  of  Santa  Maria  Novella  there  was 
a  great  chapel  which  belonged  to  the  Ricci  family. 
It  had  once  been  covered  by  beautiful  frescoes,  but 
now  it  was  spoilt  by  damp  and  the  rain  that  came 
through  the  leaking  roof.  The  noble  family,  to 
whom  the  chapel  belonged,  were  poor  and  could  not 
afford  to  have  the  chapel  repainted,  but  neither 
would  they  allow  any  one  else  to  decorate  it,  lest 
it  should  pass  out  of  their  hands. 

Now  another  noble  family,  called  the  Tourna- 
buoni,  when  they  heard  of  the  fame  of  the  new 
painter,  greatly  desired  to  have  a  chapel  painted 
by  him  in  order  to  do  honour  to  their  name  and 
family. 

Accordingly  they  went  to  the  Ricci  family  and 
offered  to  have  the  whole  chapel  painted  and  to  pay 

E 


66  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  artist  themselves.  Moreover,  they  said  that 
the  arms  or  crest  of  the  Ricci  family  should  be 
painted  in  the  most  honourable  part  of  the  chapel, 
that  all  might  see  that  the  chapel  still  belonged  to 
them. 

To  this  the  Ricci  family  gladly  agreed,  and 
Ghirlandaio  was  set  to  work  to  cover  the  walls  with 
his  frescoes. 

*  I  will  give  thee  twelve  hundred  gold  pieces  when 
it  is  done,'  said  Giovanni  Tournabuoni,  '  and  if  I 
like  it  well,  then  shalt  thou  have  two  hundred  more.' 

Here  was  good  pay  indeed.  Ghirlandaio  set  to 
work  with  all  speed,  and  day  by  day  the  frescoes 
grew.  For  four  years  he  worked  hard,  from 
morning  until  night,  until  at  last  the  walls  were 
covered. 

One  of  the  subjects  which  he  chose  for  these 
frescoes  was  the  story  of  the  Life  of  the  Virgin,  so 
often  painted  by  Florentine  artists.  This  story  I 
will  tell  you  now,  that  your  eyes  may  take  greater 
pleasure  in  the  pictures  when  you  see  them. 

The  Bible  story  of  the  Virgin  Mary  begins  when 
the  Angel  Gabriel  came  to  tell  her  of  the  birth  of 
the  Baby  Jesus,  but  there  are  many  stories  or 
legends  about  her  before  that  time,  and  this  is  one 
which  the  Italians  specially  loved  to  paint. 

Among  the  blue  hills  of  Galilee,  in  the  little  town 
of  Nazareth,  there  lived  a  man  and  his  wife  whose 
names  were  Joachim  and  Anna.  Though  they  were 
rich  and  had  many  flocks  of  sheep  which  fed  in  the 
rich  pastures  around,  still  there  was  one  thing  which 
God  had  not  given  them  and  which  they  longed 


Q 
is 

3 

PS 

M 

w 

0 


'ORK 


ASTOR,    L' 
riLDED    FOlK.DA    IONC 


DOMENICO  GHIRLANDAIO  67 

for  more  than  all  beside.  They  had  no  child.  They 
had  hoped  that  God  would  send  one,  but  now  they 
were  both  growing  old,  and  hope  began  to  fade. 

Joachim  was  a  very  good  man,  and  gave  a  third 
of  all  that  he  had  as  an  offering  to  the  temple ;  but 
one  sad  day  when  he  took  his  gift,  the  high  priest 
at  the  altar  refused  to  take  it. 

*  God  has  shown  that  He  will  have  nought  of 
thee,'  said  the  priest,  *  since  thou  hast  no  child  to 
come  after  thee.' 

Filled  with  shame  and  grief  Joachim  would  not 
<FO  home  to  his  wife,  but  instead  he  wandered  out 

o 

into  the  far-off  fields  where  his  shepherds  were 
feeding  the  flocks,  and  there  he  stayed  forty  days. 
With  bowed  head  and  sad  eyes  when  he  was  alone, 
he  knelt  and  prayed  that  God  would  tell  him  what 
he  had  done  to  deserve  this  disgrace. 

And  as  he  prayed  God  sent  an  angel  to  comfort 
him. 

The  angel  placed  his  hand  upon  the  bowed  head 
of  the  poor  old  man,  and  told  him  to  be  of  good 
cheer  and  to  return  home  at  once  to  his  wife. 

'  For  God  will  even  now  send  thee  a  child,'  said 
the  angel. 

So  with  a  thankful  heart  which  never  doubted 
the  angel's  word,  Joachim  turned  his  face  home- 
wards. 

Meanwhile,  at  home,  Anna  had  been  sorrowing 
alone.  That  same  day  she  had  gone  into  the  garden, 
and,  as  she  wandered  among  the  flowers,  she  wept 
bitterly  and  prayed  that  God  would  send  her  com- 
fort. Then  there  appeared  to  her  also  an  angel,  who 


68  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

told  her  that  God  had  heard  her  prayer  and  would 
send  her  the  child  she  longed  for. 

'  Go  now,'  the  angel  added,  '  and  meet  thy 
husband  Joachim,  who  is  even  now  returning  to 
thee,  and  thou  shall  find  him  at  the  entrance  to  the 
Golden  Gate.' 

So  the  husband  and  wife  did  as  the  angel 
bade  them,  and  met  together  at  the  Golden  Gate. 
And  the  Angel  of  Promise  hovered  above  them, 
and  laid  a  hand  in  blessing  upon  both  their  heads. 

There  was  no  need  for  speech.  As  Joachim  and 
Anna  looked  into  each  other's  eyes  and  read  there 
the  solemn  joy  of  the  angel's  message,  their  hearts 
were  filled  with  peace  and  comfort. 

And  before  long  the  angel's  promise  was  fulfilled, 
and  a  little  daughter  was  born  to  Anna  and  Joachim. 
In  their  joy  and  thankfulness  they  said  she  should 
not  be  as  other  children,  but  should  serve  in  the 
temple  as  little  Samuel  had  done.  The  name  they 
gave  the  child  was  Mary,  not  knowing  even  then 
that  she  was  to  be  the  mother  of  our  Lord. 

The  little  maid  was  but  three  years  old  when  her 
parents  took  her  to  present  her  in  the  temple.  She 
was  such  a  little  child  that  they  almost  feared  she 
might  be  frightened  to  go  up  the  steps  to  the  great 
temple  and  meet  the  high  priest  alone.  So  they 
asked  if  she  might  go  in  company  with  the  other 
children  who  were  also  on  their  way  to  the  temple. 
But  when  the  little  band  arrived  at  the  temple 
steps,  Mary  stepped  forward  and  began  to  climb 
up,  step  by  step,  alone,  while  the  other  children 
and  her  parents  watched  wondering  from  below. 


DOMENICO  GHIRLANDAIO  69 

Straight  up  to  the  temple  gates  she  climbed,  and 
stood  with  little  head  bent  low  to  receive  the 
blessing  of  the  great  high  priest. 

So  the  child  was  left  there  to  be  taught  to  serve 
God  and  to  learn  how  to  embroider  the  purple  and 
fine  linen  for  the  priests'  vestments.  Never  before 
had  such  exquisite  embroidery  been  done  as  that 
which  Mary's  fingers  so  delicately  stitched,  for  her 
work  was  aided  by  angel  hands.  Sleeping  or 
waking,  the  blessed  angels  never  left  her. 

When  it  was  time  that  the  maiden  should  be 
married,  so  many  suitors  came  to  seek  her  that  it 
was  difficult  to  know  which  to  choose.  To  decide 
the  matter  they  were  all  told  to  bring  their  staves 
or  wands  and  leave  them  in  the  temple  all  night, 
that  God  might  show  by  a  sign  who  was  the 
most  worthy  to  be  the  guardian  of  the  pure  young 
maid. 

Now  among  the  suitors  was  a  poor  carpenter  of 
Nazareth  called  Joseph,  who  was  much  older  and 
much  poorer  than  any  of  the  other  suitors.  They 
thought  it  was  foolish  of  him  to  bring  his  staff, 
nevertheless  it  was  placed  in  the  temple  with  the 
others. 

But  when  the  morning  came  and  the  priest  went 
into  the  temple,  behold,  Joseph's  staff  had  budded 
into  leaves  and  flowers,  and  from  among  the 
blossoms  there  flew  out  a  dove  as  white  as  snow. 

So  it  was  known  that  Joseph  was  to  take  charge 
of  the  young  maid,  and  all  the  rest  of  the  suitors 
seized  their  staves  and  broke  them  across  their 
knees  in  rage  and  disappointment. 


70  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Then  the  story  goes  on  to  the  birth  of  our 
Saviour  as  it  is  told  to  you  in  the  Bible. 

It  was  this  story  which  Ghirlandaio  painted  on 
the  walls  of  the  chapel,  as  well  as  the  history  of 
John  the  Baptist.  Then,  as  Giovanni  directed,  he 
painted  the  arms  of  the  Tournabuoni  on  various 
shields  all  over  the  chapel,  and  only  in  the  taber- 
nacle of  the  sacrament  on  the  high  altar  he 
painted  a  tiny  coat  of  arms  of  the  Ricci  family. 

The  chapel  was  finished  at  last  and  every  one 
flocked  to  see  it,  but  first  of  all  came  the  Ricci,  the 
owners  of  the  chapel. 

They  looked  high  and  low,  but  nowhere  could 
they  see  the  arms  of  their  family.  Instead,  on  all 
sides,  they  saw  the  arms  of  the  Tournabuoni.  In  a 
great  rage  they  hurried  to  the  Council  and  de- 
manded that  Giovanni  Tournabuoni  should  be 
punished.  But  when  the  facts  were  explained,  and 
it  was  shown  that  the  Ricci  arms  had  indeed  been 
placed  in  the  most  honourable  part,  they  were 
obliged  to  be  content,  though  they  vowed  vengeance 
against  the  Tournabuoni.  Neither  did  Ghirlandaio 
get  his  extra  two  hundred  gold  pieces,  for  although 
Giovanni  was  delighted  with  the  frescoes  he  never 
paid  the  price  he  had  promised. 

To  the  end  of  his  days  Ghirlandaio  loved  nothing 
so  much  as  to  work  from  morning  till  night. 
Nothing  was  too  small  or  mean  for  him  to  do. 
He  would  even  paint  the  hoops  for  women's  baskets 
rather  than  send  any  work  away  from  his  shop. 

*  Oh,'  he  cried,  one  day,  '  how  I  wish  1  could 
paint  all  the  walls  around  Florence  with  my  stories.' 


DOMENICO  GHIRLANDAIO  71 

But  there  was  no  time  to  do  all  that.  He  was 
only  forty-four  years  old  when  Death  came  and  bade 
him  lay  down  his  brushes  and  pencil,  for  his  work 
was  done. 

Beneath  his  own  frescoes  they  laid  him  to  rest 
in  the  church  of  Santa  Maria  Novella.  And 
although  we  sometimes  miss  the  soul  in  his  pictures 
and  weary  of  the  gay  outward  decoration  of  gold- 
smith's work,  yet  there  is  something  there  which 
makes  us  love  the  grand  show  of  fair  ladies  and  strong 
men  in  the  carefully  finished  work  of  this  Florentine 
*  Maker  of  Garlands.' 


FILIPPINO  LIPPI 

THE  little  curly-haired  Filippino,  left  in  the  charge 
of  good  Fra  Diamante,  soon  showed  that  he  meant 
to  be  a  painter  like  his  father.  When,  as  a  little 
boy,  he  drew  his  pictures  and  showed  them  proudly 
to  his  mother,  he  told  her  that  he,  too,  would  learn 
some  day  to  be  a  great  artist.  And  she,  half  smiling, 
would  pat  his  curly  head  and  tell  him  that  he  could 
at  least  try  his  best. 

Then,  after  that  sad  day  when  Lucrezia  heard  of 
Filippo's  death,  and  the  happy  little  home  was 
broken  up,  Fra  Diamante  began  in  earnest  to  train 
the  boy  who  had  been  left  under  his  care.  He  had 
plenty  of  money,  for  Filippo  had  been  well  paid  for 
the  work  at  Spoleto,  and  so  it  was  decided  that  the 
boy  should  be  placed  in  some  studio  where  he  could 
be  taught  all  that  was  necessary. 

There  was  no  fear  of  Filippino  ever  wandering 
about  the  Florentine  streets  cold  and  hungry  as  his 
father  had  done.  And  his  training  was  very  different 
too.  Instead  of  the  convent  and  the  kind  monks, 
he  was  placed  under  the  care  of  a  great  painter,  and 
worked  in  the  master's  studio  with  other  boys  as 
well  off  as  himself. 

The  name  of  Filippino's  master  was  Sandro  Botti- 


72 


FILIPPINO  LIPPI  73 

celli,  a  Florentine  artist,  who  had  been  one  of 
Filippo's  pupils  and  had  worked  with  him  in  Prato. 
Fra  Diamante  knew  that  he  was  the  greatest  artist 
now  in  Florence,  and  that  he  would  be  able  to  teach 
the  child  better  than  any  one  else. 

Filippino  was  a  good,  industrious  boy,  and  had 
none  of  the  faults  which  had  so  often  led  his  father 
into  so  much  mischief  and  so  many  strange  adven- 
tures. His  boyhood  passed  quietly  by  and  he  learned 
all  that  his  master  could  teach  him,  and  then  began 
to  paint  his  own  pictures. 

Strangely  enough,  his  first  work  was  to  paint  the 
walls  of  the  Carmine  Chapel — that  same  chapel  where 
Filippo  and  Diamante  had  learned  their  lessons,  and 
had  gazed  with  such  awe  and  reverence  on  Masaccio's 
work. 

The  great  painter,  Ugly  Tom,  was  dead,  and  there 
were  still  parts  of  the  chapel  unfinished,  so  Filippino 
was  invited  to  fill  the  empty  spaces  with  his  work. 
No  need  for  the  new  prior  to  warn  this  young  painter 
against  the  sin  of  painting  earthly  pictures.  The 
frescoes  which  daily  grew  beneath  Filippino's  hands 
were  saintly  and  beautiful.  The  tall  angel  in  flow- 
ing white  robes  who  so  gently  leads  St.  Peter  out  of 
the  prison  door,  shines  with  a  pure  fair  light  that 
speaks  of  Heaven.  The  sleeping  soldier  looks  in  con- 
trast all  the  more  dull  and  heavy,  while  St.  Peter 
turns  his  eyes  towards  his  gentle  guide  and  folds  his 
hands  in  reverence,  wrapped  in  the  soft  reflected 
light  of  that  fair  face.  And  on  the  opposite  wall, 
the  sad  face  of  St.  Peter  looks  out  through  the  prison 
bars,  while  a  brother  saint  stands  outside,  and  with 


74  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

uplifted  hand  speaks  comforting  words  to  the  poor 
prisoner. 

By  slow  degrees  the  chapel  walls  were  finished,  and 
after  that  there  was  much  work  ready  for  the  young 
painter's  hand.  It  is  said  that  he  was  very  fond  of 
studying  old  Roman  ornaments  and  painted  them 
into  his  pictures  whenever  it  was  possible,  and  became 
very  famous  for  this  kind  of  work.  But  it  is  the  beauty 
of  his  Madonnas  and  angels  that  makes  us  love  his 
pictures,  and  we  like  to  think  that  the  memory  of 
his  gentle  mother  taught  him  how  to  paint  those 
lovely  faces. 

Perhaps  of  all  his  pictures  the  most  beautiful  is  one 
in  the  church  of  the  Badia  in  Florence.  It  tells  the 
story  of  the  blessed  St.  Bernard,  and  shows  the  saint 
in  his  desert  home,  as  he  sat  among  the  rocks  writ- 
ing the  history  of  the  Madonna.  He  had  not  been 
able  to  write  that  day ;  perhaps  he  felt  dull,  and  none 
of  his  books,  scattered  around,  were  of  any  help. 
Then,  as  he  sat  lost  in  thought,  with  his  pen  in  his 
hand,  the  Virgin  herself  stood  before  him,  an  angel  on 
either  side,  and  little  angel  faces  pressed  close  behind 
her.  Laying  a  gentle  hand  upon  his  book,  she 
seems  to  tell  St.  Bernard  all  those  golden  words 
which  his  poor  earthly  pen  had  not  been  able  yet  to 
write. 

It  used  to  be  the  custom  long  ago  in  Italy  to  place 
in  the  streets  sacred  pictures  or  figures,  that  passers- 
by  might  be  reminded  of  holy  things  and  say  a  prayer 
in  passing.  And  still  in  many  towns  you  will  find  in 
some  old  dusty  corner  a  beautiful  picture,  painted  by 
a  master  hand.  A  gleam  of  colour  will  catch  your 


S.    PETER    IN   PRISON.      By   FILIPPINO   LIPPI 
'The  sad  face  of  S.   Peter  looks  out  through  the  prison  bars' 


FILIPPINO  LIPPI  75 

eye,  and  looking  up  you  see  a  picture  or  little  shrine 
of  exquisite  blue-and-whlte  glazed  pottery,  where 
the  Madonna  kneels  and  worships  the  Infant  Christ 
lying  amongst  the  lilies  at  her  feet.  The  old  battered 
lamp  which  hangs  in  front  of  these  shrines  is  still 
kept  lighted  by  some  faithful  hand,  and  in  spring- 
time the  children  will  often  come  and  lay  little 
bunches  of  wild-flowers  on  the  ledge  below. 

*  It  is  for  the  Jesu  Bambino,'  they  will  say,  and 
their  little  faces  grow  solemn  and  reverent  as  they 
kneel  and  say  a  prayer.  Then  off  again  they  go  to 
their  play. 

In  a  little  side-street  of  Prato,  not  far  from  the 
convent  where  Filippino's  father  first  saw  Lucrezia's 
lovely  face  in  the  sunny  garden,  there  is  one  of  these 
wayside  shrines.  It  is  painted  by  Filippino,  and  is 
one  of  his  most  beautiful  pictures.  The  sweet  face 
of  the  Madonna  looks  down  upon  the  busy  street 
below,  and  the  Holy  Child  lifts  His  little  hand  in 
blessing,  amid  the  saints  which  stand  on  either 
side. 

The  glass  that  covers  the  picture  is  thick  with 
dust,  and  few  who  pass  ever  stop  to  look  up.  The 
world  is  all  too  busy  nowadays.  The  hurrying  feet 
pass  by,  the  unseeing  eyes  grow  more  and  more 
careless.  But  Filippino's  beautiful  Madonna  looks 
on  with  calm,  sad  eyes,  and  the  Christ  Child,  sur- 
rounded by  the  cloud  of  little  angel  faces,  still  holds 
in  His  uplifted  hand  a  blessing  for  those  who 
seek  it. 

Like  all  the  great  Florentine  artists,  Filippino,  as 
soon  as  he  grew  famous,  was  invited  to  Rome,  and 


76  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

he  painted  many  pictures  there.  On  his  way  he 
stopped  for  a  while  at  Spoleto,  and  there  he  de- 
signed a  beautiful  marble  monument  for  his  father's 
tomb. 

Unlike  that  father,  Filippino  was  never  fond  of 
travel  or  adventure,  and  was  always  glad  to  return 
to  Florence  and  live  his  quiet  life  there.  Not  even 
an  invitation  from  the  King  of  Hungary  could  tempt 
him  to  leave  home. 

It  was  in  the  great  church  of  Santa  Maria  Novella 
in  Florence  that  Filippino  painted  his  last  frescoes. 
They  are  very  real  and  lifelike,  as  one  of  the  great 
painter's  pupils  once  learned  to  his  cost.  Filippino 
had,  of  course,  many  pupils  who  worked  under  him. 
They  ground  his  colours  and  watched  him  work, 
and  would  sometimes  be  allowed  to  prepare  the  less 
important  parts  of  the  picture. 

Now  it  happened  that  one  day  when  the  master 
had  finished  his  work  and  had  left  the  chapel,  that 
one  of  the  pupils  lingered  behind.  His  sharp  eye 
had  caught  sight  of  a  netted  purse  which  lay  in  a  dark 
corner,  dropped  there  by  some  careless  visitor,  or 
perhaps  by  the  master  himself.  The  boy  darted 
back  and  caught  up  the  treasure;  but  at  that 
moment  the  master  turned  back  to  fetch  some- 
thing he  had  forgotten.  The  boy  looked  quickly 
round.  Where  could  he  hide  his  prize  ?  In  a 
moment  his  eye  fell  on  a  hole  in  the  wall,  under- 
neath a  step  which  Filippino  had  been  painting  in 
the  fresco.  That  was  the  very  place,  and  he  ran 
forward  to  thrust  the  purse  inside.  But,  alas  !  the 
hole  was  only  a  painted  one,  and  the  boy  was  fairly 


FILIPPINO  LIPPI  77 

caught,  and  was  obliged  with  shame  and  confusion 
to  give  up  his  prize. 

Scarcely  were  these  frescoes  finished  when  Filip- 
pino  was  seized  with  a  terrible  fever,  and  he  died 
almost  as  suddenly  as  his  father  had  done. 

In  those  days  when  there  was  a  funeral  of  a  prince 
in  Florence,  the  Florentines  used  to  shut  their  shops, 
and  this  was  considered  a  great  mark  of  respect, 
and  was  paid  only  to  those  of  royal  blood.  But  on 
the  day  that  Filippino's  funeral  passed  along  the 
Via  dei  Servi,  every  shop  there  was  closed  and  all 
Florence  mourned  for  him. 

'  Some  men,'  they  said,  '  are  born  princes,  and 
some  raise  themselves  by  their  talents  to  be  kings 
among  men.  Our  Filippino  was  a  prince  in  Art,  and 
so  do  we  do  honour  to  his  title.' 


PIETRO   PERUGINO 

IT  was  early  morning,  and  the  rays  of  the  rising 
sun  had  scarcely  yet  caught  the  roofs  of  the  city 
of  Perugia,  when  along  the  winding  road  which  led 
across  the  plain  a  man  and  a  boy  walked  with 
steady,  purpose! ike  steps  towards  the  town  which 
crowned  the  hill  in  front. 

The  man  was  poorly  dressed  in  the  common 
rough  clothes  of  an  Umbrian  peasant.  Hard  work 
and  poverty  had  bent  his  shoulders  and  drawn  stern 
lines  upon  his  face,  but  there  was  a  dignity  about 
him  which  marked  him  as  something  above  the 
common  working  man. 

The  little  boy  who  trotted  barefoot  along  by  the 
side  of  his  father  had  a  sweet,  serious  little  face,  but 
he  looked  tired  and  hungry,  and  scarcely  fit  for  such 
a  long  rough  walk.  They  had  started  from  their 
home  at  Castello  delle  Pieve  very  early  that  morn- 
ing, and  the  piece  of  black  bread  which  had  served 
them  for  breakfast  had  been  but  small,  Away  in 
front  stretched  that  long,  white,  never-ending  road  ; 
and  the  little  dusty  feet  that  pattered  so  bravely 
along  had  to  take  hurried  runs  now  and  again  to 
keep  up  with  the  long  strides  of  the  man,  while  the 
wistful  eyes,  which  were  fixed  on  that  distant  town, 
seemed  to  wonder  if  they  would  really  ever  reach 
their  journey's  end. 

78 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  79 

*  Art  tired  already,  Pietro  ? '  asked  the  father  at 
length,  hearing  a  panting  little  sigh  at  his  side. 
'  Why,  we  are  not  yet  half-way  there  !  Thou  must 
step  bravely  out  and  be  a  man,  for  to-day  thou  shalt 
begin  to  work  for  thy  living,  and  no  longer  live  the 
life  of  an  idle  child.' 

The  boy  squared  his  shoulders,  and  his  eyes  shone. 

'  It  is  not  I  who  am  tired,  my  father,'  he  said. 
'  It  is  only  that  my  legs  cannot  take  such  good  long 
steps  as  thine ;  and  walk  as  we  will  the  road  ever 
seems  to  unwind  itself  further  and  further  in  front, 
like  the  magic  white  thread  which  has  no  end.' 

The  father  laughed,  and  patted  the  child's  head 
kindly. 

'  The  end  will  come  ere  long,'  he  said.  '  See 
where  the  mist  lies  at  the  foot  of  the  hill ;  there  we 
will  begin  to  climb  among  the  olive-trees  and  leave 
the  dusty  road.  I  know  a  quicker  way  by  which 
we  may  reach  the  city.  We  will  climb  over  the 
great  stones  that  mark  the  track  of  the  stream,  and 
before  the  sun  grows  too  hot  we  will  have  reached 
the  city  gates.' 

It  was  a  great  relief  to  the  little  hot,  tired  feet  to 
feel  the  cool  grass  beneath  them,  and  to  leave  the 
dusty  road.  The  boy  almost  forgot  his  tiredness  as 
he  scrambled  from  stone  to  stone,  and  filled  his 
hands  with  the  violets  which  grew  thickly  on  the 
banks,  scenting  the  morning  air  with  their  sweet- 
ness. And  when  at  last  they  came  out  once  more 
upon  the  great  white  road  before  the  city  gates, 
there  was  so  much  to  gaze  upon  and  wonder  at,  that 
there  was  no  room  for  thoughts  of  weariness  or  hunger. 


80  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

There  stood  the  herds  of  great  white  oxen, 
patiently  waiting  to  pass  in.  Pietro  wondered  if 
their  huge  wide  horns  would  not  reach  from  side  to 
side  of  the  narrow  street  within  the  gates.  There 
the  shepherd-boys  played  sweet  airs  upon  their 
pipes  as  they  walked  before  their  flocks,  and  led  the 
silly  frightened  sheep  out  of  the  way  of  passing 
carts.  Women  with  bright-coloured  handkerchiefs 
tied  over  their  heads  crowded  round,  carrying 
baskets  of  fruit  and  vegetables  from  the  country 
round.  Carts  full  of  scarlet  and  yellow  pumpkins 
were  driven  noisily  along.  Whips  cracked,  people 
shouted  and  talked  as  much  with  their  hands  as 
with  their  lips,  and  all  were  eager  to  pass  through 
the  great  Etruscan  gateway,  which  stood  grim  and 
tall  against  the  blue  of  the  summer  sky.  Much 
good  service  had  that  gateway  seen,  and  it  was  as 
strong  as  when  it  had  been  first  built  hundreds  of 
years  before,  and  was  still  able  to  shut  out  an  army 
of  enemies,  if  Perugia  had  need  to  defend  herself. 

Pietro  and  his  father  quickly  threaded  their  way 
through  the  crowd,  and  passed  through  the  gateway 
into  the  steep  narrow  street  beyond.  It  was  cool 
and  quiet  here.  The  sun  was  shut  out  by  the  tall 
houses,  and  the  shadows  lay  so  deep  that  one  might 
have  thought  it  was  the  hour  of  twilight,  but  for  the 
peep  of  bright  blue  sky  which  showed  between  the 
overhanging  eaves  above.  Presently  they  reached 
the  great  square  market-place,  where  all  again  was 
sunshine  and  bustle,  with  people  shouting  and  selling 
their  wares,  which  they  spread  out  on  the  ground 
up  to  the  very  steps  of  the  cathedral  and  all  along 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  81 

in  front  of  the  Palazzo  Publico.  Here  the  man 
stopped,  and  asked  one  of  the  passers-by  if  he  could 
direct  him  to  the  shop  of  Niccol6  the  painter. 

'Yonder  he  dwells,'  answered  the  citizen,  and 
pointed  to  a  humble  shop  at  the  corner  of  the 
market-place.  '  Hast  thou  brought  the  child  to  be 
a  model  ? ' 

Pietro  held  his  head  up  proudly,  and  answered 
quickly  for  himself. 

*I  am  no  longer  a  child,'  he  said;  'and  I  have 
come  to  work  and  not  to  sit  idle.' 

The  man  laughed  and  went  his  way,  while  father 
and  son  hurried  on  towards  the  little  shop  and 
entered  the  door. 

The  old  painter  was  busy,  and  they  had  to  wait 
a  while  until  he  could  leave  his  work  and  come  to 
see  what  they  might  want. 

'  This  is  the  boy  of  whom  I  spoke,'  said  the 
father  as  he  pushed  Pietro  forward  by  his  shoulder. 
'  He  is  not  well  grown,  but  he  is  strong,  and  has 
learnt  to  endure  hardness.  I  promise  thee  that  he 
will  serve  thee  well  if  thou  wilt  take  him  as  thy 
servant.' 

The  painter  smiled  down  at  the  little  eager  face 
which  was  waiting  so  anxiously  for  his  answer. 

'  What  canst  thou  do  ? '  he  asked  the  boy. 

'  Everything,'  answered  Pietro  promptly.  « I  can 
sweep  out  thy  shop  and  cook  thy  dinner.  I  will 
learn  to  grind  thy  colours  and  wash  thy  brushes, 
and  do  a  man's  work.' 

'  In  faith,'  laughed  the  painter,  '  if  thou  canst  do 
everything,  being  yet  so  young,  thou  wilt  soon  be 

F 


82  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  greatest  man  in  Perugia,  and  bring  great  fame 
to  this  fair  city.  Then  will  we  call  thee  no  longer 
Pietro  Vanucci,  but  thou  shalt  take  the  city's  name, 
and  we  will  call  thee  Perugino.' 

The  master  spoke  in  jest,  but  as  time  went  on 
and  he  watched  the  boy  at  work,  he  marvelled  at 
the  quickness  with  which  the  child  learned  to  per- 
form his  new  duties,  and  began  to  think  the  jest 
might  one  day  turn  to  earnest. 

From  early  morning  until  sundown  Pietro  was 
never  idle,  and  when  the  rough  work  was  done  he 
would  stand  and  watch  the  master  as  he  painted, 
and  listen  breathless  to  the  tales  which  Niccolo 
loved  to  tell. 

'  There  is  nothing  so  great  in  all  the  world  as  the 
art  of  painting,'  the  master  would  say.  *  It  is  the 
ladder  that  leads  up  to  heaven,  the  window  which 
lets  light  into  the  soul.  A  painter  need  never  be 
lonely  or  poor.  He  can  create  the  faces  he  loves, 
while  all  the  riches  of  light  and  colour  and  beauty 
are  always  his.  If  thou  hast  it  in  thee  to  be  a 
painter,  my  little  Perugino,  I  can  wish  thee  no 
greater  fortune.' 

Then  when  the  day's  work  was  done  and  the 
short  spell  of  twilight  drew  near,  the  boy  would 
leave  the  shop  and  run  swiftly  down  the  narrow 
street  until  he  came  to  the  grim  old  city  gates. 
Once  outside,  under  the  wide  blue  sky  in  the  free 
open  air  of  the  country,  he  drew  a  long,  long  breath 
of  pleasure,  and  quickly  found  a  hidden  corner  in 
the  cleft  of  the  hoary  trunk  of  an  olive-tree,  where 
no  passer-by  could  see  him.  There  he  sat,  his  chin 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  83 

resting  on  his  hands,  gazing  and  gazing  out  over 
the  plain  below,  drinking  in  the  beauty  with  his 
hungry  eyes. 

How  he  loved  that  great  open  space  of  sweet 
fresh  air,  in  the  calm  pure  light  of  the  evening  hour. 
That  white  light,  which  seemed  to  belong  more  to 
heaven  than  to  earth,  shone  on  everything  around. 
Away  in  the  distance  the  purple  hills  faded  into  the 
sunset  sky.  At  his  feet  the  plain  stretched  away, 
away  until  it  met  the  mountains,  here  and  there 
lifting  itself  in  some  little  hill  crowned  by  a  lonely 
town  whose  roofs  just  caught  the  rays  of  the  setting 
sun.  The  evening  mist  lay  like  a  gossamer  veil 
upon  the  low-lying  lands,  and  between  the  little 
towns  the  long  straight  road  could  be  seen,  winding 
like  a  white  ribbon  through  the  grey  and  silver,  and 
marked  here  and  there  by  a  dark  cypress-tree  or  a 
tall  poplar.  And  always  there  would  be  a  glint 
of  blue,  where  a  stream  or  river  caught  the 
reflection  of  the  sky  and  held  it  lovingly  there,  like 
a  mirror  among  the  rocks. 

But  Pietro  did  not  have  much  time  for  idle 
dreaming.  His  was  not  an  easy  life,  for  Niccol6 
made  but  little  money  with  his  painting,  and  the 
boy  had  to  do  all  the  work  of  the  house  besides 
attending  to  the  shop.  But  all  the  time  he  was 
sweeping  and  dusting  he  looked  forward  to  the 
happy  days  to  come  when  he  might  paint  pictures 
and  become  a  famous  artist. 

Whenever  a  visitor  came  to  the  shop,  Pietro 
would  listen  eagerly  to  his  talk  and  try  to  learn 
something  of  the  great  world  of  Art.  Sometimes  he 


84  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

would  even  venture  to  ask  questions,  if  the  stranger 
happened  to  be  one  who  had  travelled  from  afar. 

*  Where  are   the  most   beautiful  pictures  to  be 
found  ? '  he  asked  one  day  when  a  Florentine  painter 
had  come  to  the  little  shop  and  had  been  describing 
the  glories  he  had  seen  in  other  cities.     '  And  where 
is  it  that  the  greatest  painters  dwell  ? ' 

'  That  is  an  easy  question  to  answer,  my  boy,'  said 
the  painter.  'All  that  is  fairest  is  to  be  found  in 
Florence,  the  most  beautiful  city  in  all  the  world, 
the  City  of  Flowers.  There  one  may  find  the  best  of 
everything,  but  above  all,  the  most  beautiful  pictures 
and  the  greatest  of  painters.  For  no  one  there  can 
bear  to  do  only  the  second  best,  and  a  man  must 
attain  to  the  very  highest  before  the  Florentines 
will  call  him  great.  The  walls  of  the  churches  and 
monasteries  are  covered  with  pictures  of  saints  and 
angels,  and  their  beauty  no  words  can  describe.' 

*  I  too  will  go  to  Florence,  said  Pietro  to  himself, 
and  every  day  he  longed  more  and  more  to  see  that 
wonderful  city. 

It  was  no  use  to  wait  until  he  should  have  saved 
enough  money  to  take  him  there.  He  scarcely 
earned  enough  to  live  on  from  day  to  day.  So  at 
last,  poor  as  he  was,  lie  started  off  early  one  morn- 
ing and  said  good-bye  to  his  old  master  and  the  hard 
work  of  the  little  shop  in  Perugia.  On  he  went 
down  the  same  long  white  road  which  had  seemed 
so  endless  to  him  that  day  when,  as  a  little  child,  he 
first  came  to  Perugia.  Even  now,  when  he  was 
a  strong  young  man,  the  way  seemed  long  and 
weary  across  that  great  plain,  and  he  was  often  foot- 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  85 

sore  and  discouraged.  Day  after  day  he  travelled 
on,  past  the  great  lake  which  lay  like  a  sapphire  in 
the  bosom  of  the  plain,  past  many  towns  and  little 
villages,  until  at  last  he  came  in  sight  of  the  City 
of  Flowers. 

It  was  a  wonderful  moment  to  Perugino,  and  he 
held  his  breath  as  he  looked.  He  had  passed  the  brow 
of  the  hill,  and  stood  beside  a  little  stream  bordered 
by  a  row  of  tall,  straight  poplars  which  showed 
silvery  white  against  the  blue  sky.  Beyond,  nestling 
at  the  foot  of  the  encircling  hills,  lay  the  city  of  his 
dreams.  Towers  and  palaces,  a  crowding  together 
of  pale  red  sunbaked  roofs,  with  the  great  dome  of 
the  cathedral  in  the  midst,  and  the  silver  thread 
of  the  Arno  winding  its  way  between — all  this  he 
saw,  but  he  saw  more  than  this.  For  it  seemed  to 
him  that  the  Spirit  of  Beauty  hovered  above  the  fair 
city,  and  he  almost  heard  the  rustle  of  her  wings 
and  caught  a  glimpse  of  her  rainbow-tinted  robe  in 
the  light  of  the  evening  sky. 

Poor  Pietro  !  Here  was  the  world  he  longed  to 
conquer,  but  he  was  only  a  poor  country  boy,  and 
how  was  he  to  begin  to  climb  that  golden  ladder  of 
Art  which  led  men  to  fame  and  glory  ? 

Well,  he  could  work,  and  that  was  always  a 
beginning.  The  struggle  was  hard,  and  for  many  a 
month  he  often  went  hungry  and  had  not  even 
a  bed  to  lie  on  at  night,  but  curled  himself  up  on  a 
hard  wooden  chest.  Then  good  fortune  began  to 
smile  upon  him. 

The  Florentine  artists  to  whose  studios  he  went 
began  to  notice  the  hardworking  boy,  and  when 


86  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

they  looked  at  his  work,  with  all  its  faults  and  want 
of  finish,  they  saw  in  it  that  divine  something  called 
genius  which  no  one  can  mistake. 

Then  the  doors  of  another  world  seemed  to  open 
to  Pietro.  All  day  long  he  could  now  work  at  his 
beloved  painting  and  learn  fresh  wonders  as  he 
watched  the  great  men  use  the  brush  and  pencil. 
In  the  studio  of  the  painter  Verocchio  he  met  the 
men  of  whose  fame  he  had  so  often  heard,  and  whose 
work  he  looked  upon  with  awe  and  reverence. 

There  was  the  good-tempered  monk  of  the  Carmine, 
Fra  Filipo  Lippi,  the  young  Botticelli,  and  a  youth 
just  his  own  age  whom  they  called  Leonardo  da 
Vinci,  of  whom  it  was  whispered  already  that  he 
would  some  day  be  the  greatest  master  of  the 
age. 

These  were  golden  days  for  Perugino,  as  he  was 
called,  for  the  name  of  the  city  where  he  had  come 
from  was  always  now  given  to  him.  The  pictures 
he  had  longed  to  paint  grew  beneath  his  hand, 
and  upon  his  canvas  began  to  dawn  the  solemn 
dignity  and  open-air  spaciousness  of  those  evening 
visions  he  had  seen  when  he  gazed  across  the 
Umbrian  Plain.  There  was  no  noise  of  battle,  no 
human  passion  in  his  pictures.  His  saints  stood 
quiet  and  solemn,  single  figures  with  just  a  thread 
of  interest  binding  them  together,  and  always  beyond 
was  the  great  wide  open  world,  with  the  white  light 
shining  in  the  sky,  the  blue  thread  of  the  river,  and 
the  single  trees  pointing  upwards — dark,  solemn 
cypress,  or  feathery  larch  or  poplar. 

There  was  much  for  the  young  painter  still  to 


TWO    SAINTS    FROM    THE    FRESCO    OF    THE    CRUCIFIXION 
By   PERUGINO 

"Bey.jnd  was  the  blue  thread  of  river  and  the  single  trees  pointing  upwards" 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  87 

learn,  and  perhaps  he  learned  most  from  the  silent 
teaching  of  that  little  dark  chapel  of  the  Carmine, 
where  Masaccio  taught  more  wonderful  lessons  by 
his  frescoes  than  any  living  artist  could  teach. 

Then  came  the  crowning  honour  when  Perugino 
received  an  invitation  from  the  Pope  to  go  to  Rome 
and  paint  the  walls  of  the  Sistine  Chapel.  Hence- 
forth it  was  a  different  kind  of  life  for  the  young 
painter.  No  need  to  wonder  where  he  would  get 
his  next  meal,  no  hard  rough  wooden  chest  on  which 
to  rest  his  weary  limbs  when  the  day's  work  was 
done.  Now  he  was  royally  entertained  and  softly 
lodged,  and  men  counted  it  an  honour  to  be  in  his 
company. 

But  though  he  loved  Florence  and  was  proud  to 
do  his  painting  in  Rome,  his  heart  ever  drew  him 
back  to  the  city  on  the  hill  whose  name  he  bore. 

Again  he  travelled  along  the  winding  road,  and 
his  heart  beat  fast  as  he  drew  nearer  and  saw  the 
familiar  towers  and  roofs  of  Perugia.  How  well  he 
remembered  that  long-ago  day  when  the  cool  touch 
of  the  grass  was  so  grateful  to  his  little  tired  dusty 
feet !  He  stooped  again  to  fill  his  hands  with  the 
sweet  violets,  and  thought  them  sweeter  than  all  the 
fame  and  fair  show  of  the  gay  cities. 

And  as  he  passed  through  the  ancient  gateway 
and  threaded  his  way  up  the  narrow  street  towards 
the  little  shop,  he  seemed  to  see  once  more  the 
kindly  smile  of  his  old  master  and  to  hear  him  say, 
'Thou  wilt  soon  be  the  greatest  man  in  Perugia, 
and  we  will  call  thee  no  longer  Pietro  Vanucci,  but 
Perugino.' 


88  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

So  it  had  come  to  pass.  Here  he  was.  No  longer 
a  little  ragged,  hungry  boy,  but  a  man  whom  all 
delighted  to  honour.  Truly  this  was  a  world  of 
changes ! 

A  bigger  studio  was  needed  than  the  little  old  shop, 
for  now  he  had  more  pictures  to  paint  than  he  well 
knew  how  to  finish.  Then,  too,  he  had  many  pupils, 
for  all  were  eager  to  enter  the  studio  of  the  great 
master.  There  it  was  that  one  morning  a  new 
pupil  was  brought  to  him,  a  boy  of  twelve,  whose 
guardians  begged  that  Perugino  would  teach  and 
train  him. 

Perugino  looked  with  interest  at  the  child.  Seldom 
had  he  seen  such  a  beautiful  oval  face,  framed  by 
such  soft  brown  curls — a  face  so  pure  and  lovable 
that  even  at  first  sight  it  drew  out  love  from  the 
hearts  of  those  who  looked  at  him. 

*  His  father  was  also  a  painter,'  said  the  guardian, 
'  and  Raphael,  here,  has  caught  the  trick  of  using  his 
pencil  and  brush,  so  we  would  have  him  learn  of  the 
greatest  master  in  the  land.' 

After  some  talk,  the  boy  was  left  in  the  studio  at 
Perugia,  and  day  by  day  Perugino  grew  to  love  him 
more.  It  was  not  only  that  little  Raphael  was 
clever  and  skilful,  though  that  alone  often  made 
the  master  marvel. 

'  He  is  my  pupil  now,  but  some  day  he  will  be 
my  master,  and  I  shall  learn  of  him,'  Perugino 
would  often  say  as  he  watched  the  boy  at  work. 
But  more  than  all,  the  pure  sweet  nature  and  the 
polished  gentleness  of  his  manners  charmed  the 
heart  of  the  master,  and  he  loved  to  have  the  boy 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  89 

always  near  him,  and  to  teach  him  was  his  greatest 
pleasure. 

Those  quiet  days  in  the  Perugia  studio  never 
lasted  very  long.  From  all  quarters  came  calls  to 
Perugino,  and,  much  as  he  loved  work,  he  could  not 
finish  all  that  was  wanted. 

It  happened  once  when  he  was  in  Florence  that  a 
certain  prior  begged  him  to  come  and  fresco  the 
walls  of  his  convent.  This  prior  was  very  famous 
for  making  a  most  beautiful  and  expensive  blue 
colour  which  he  was  anxious  should  be  used  in  the 
painting  of  the  convent  walls.  He  was  a  mean, 
suspicious  man,  and  would  not  trust  Perugino  with 
the  precious  blue  colour,  but  always  held  it  in  his 
own  hands  and  grudgingly  doled  it  out  in  small 
quantities,  torn  between  the  desire  to  have  the 
colour  on  his  walls  and  his  dislike  to  parting  with 
anything  so  precious. 

As  Perugino  noted  this,  he  grew  angry  and  de- 
termined to  punish  the  prior's  meanness.  The  next 
time  therefore  that  there  was  a  blue  sky  to  be 
painted,  he  put  at  his  side  a  large  bowl  of  fresh 
water,  and  then  called  on  the  prior  to  put  out  a 
small  quantity  of  the  blue  colour  in  a  little  vase. 
Each  time  he  dipped  his  brush  into  the  vase, 
Perugino  washed  it  out  with  a  swirl  in  the  bowl  at 
his  side,  so  that  most  of  the  colour  was  left  in  the 
water,  and  very  little  was  put  on  to  the  picture. 

'  I  pray  thee  fill  the  vase  again  with  blue,'  he  said 
carelessly  when  the  colour  was  all  gone.  The  prior 
groaned  aloud,  and  turned  grudgingly  to  his  little 
bag. 


90  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

'  Oh  what  a  quantity  of  blue  is  swallowed  up  by 
this  plaster ! '  he  said,  as  he  gazed  at  the  white  wall, 
which  scarcely  showed  a  trace  of  the  precious 
colour. 

'Yes,'  said  Perugino  cheerfully,  'thou  canst  see 
thyself  how  it  goes.' 

Then  afterwards,  when  the  prior  had  sadly  gone 
off  with  his  little  empty  bag,  Perugino  carefully 
poured  the  water  from  the  bowl  and  gathered 
together  the  grains  of  colour  which  had  sunk  to  the 
bottom. 

'  Here  is  something  that  belongs  to  thee,'  he  said 
sternly  to  the  astonished  prior.  '  I  would  have  thee 
learn  to  trust  honest  men  and  not  treat  them  as 
thieves.  For  with  all  thy  suspicious  care,  it  was 
easy  to  rob  thee  if  I  had  had  a  mind.' 

During  all  these  years  in  which  Perugino  had 
worked  so  diligently,  the  art  of  painting  had  been 
growing  rapidly.  Many  of  the  new  artists  shook 
off  the  old  rules  and  ideas,  and  began  to  paint  in 
quite  a  new  way.  There  was  one  man  especially, 
called  Michelangelo,  whose  story  you  will  hear 
later  on,  who  arose  like  a  giant,  and  with  his  new 
way  and  greater  knowledge  swept  everything  before 
him. 

Perugino  was  jealous  of  all  these  new  ideas,  and 
clung  more  closely  than  ever  to  his  old  ideals,  his 
quiet,  dignified  saints,  and  spacious  landscapes.  He 
talked  openly  of  his  dislike  of  the  new  style,  and 
once  he  had  a  serious  quarrel  with  the  great  Michel- 
angelo. 

There  was  a  gathering  of  painters  in  Pertigino's 


TWO    SAINTS    FROM    THE    FRESCO    OF    THE    CRUCIFIXION 
By   PERUGINO 

'  Quiet  dignified  saints  and  spacious  landscapes  " 


, 

i 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  91 

studio  that  day.  Filippino  Lippi,  Botticelli,  Ghir- 
landaio,  and  Leonardo  were  there,  and  in  the  back- 
ground the  pupil  Raphael  was  listening  to  the 
talk. 

*  What  dost  thou  think  of  this  new  style  of 
painting  ? '  asked  Botticelli.  '  To  me  it  seems  but 
strange  and  unpleasing.  Music  and  motion  are 
delightful,  but  this  violent  twisting  of  limbs  to  show 
the  muscles  offends  my  taste.' 

'Yet  it  is  most  marvellously  skilful,'  said  the 
young  Leonardo  thoughtfully. 

'But  totally  unfit  for  the  proper  picturing  of 
saints  and  the  blessed  Madonna,'  said  Filippino, 
shaking  his  curly  head. 

'  I  never  trouble  myself  about  it,'  said  Ghirlandaio. 
'  Life  is  too  short  to  attend  to  other  men's  work.  It 
takes  all  my  care  and  attention  to  look  after  mine 
own.  But  see,  here  comes  the  great  Michel- 
angelo himself  to  listen  to  our  criticism.' 

The  curious,  rugged  face  of  the  great  artist 
looked  good-naturedly  on  the  company,  but  his 
strong  knotted  hands  waved  aside  their  greet- 
ings. 

'  So  you  were  busy  as  usual  finding  fault  with  my 
work,'  he  said.  '  Come,  friend  Perugino,  tell  me 
what  thou  hast  found  to  grumble  at.' 

'  I  like  not  thy  methods,  and  that  I  tell  thee 
frankly,'  answered  Perugino,  an  angry  light  shining 
in  his  eyes.  '  It  is  such  work  as  thine  that  drags 
the  art  of  painting  down  from  the  heights  of 
heavenly  things  to  the  low  taste  of  earth.  It  robs 
it  of  all  dignity  and  restfulness,  and  destroys  the 


92  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

precious  traditions  handed  down  to  us  since  the  days 
of  Giotto.' 

The  face  of  Michelangelo  grew  angry  and  scorn- 
ful as  he  listened  to  this. 

'  Thou  art  but  a  dolt  and  a  blockhead  in  Art,'  he 
said.  *  Thou  wilt  soon  see  that  the  day  of  thy 
saints  and  Madonnas  is  past,  and  wilt  cease  to  paint 
them  over  and  over  again  in  the  same  manner,  as  a 
child  doth  his  lesson  in  a  copy  book.' 

Then  he  turned  and  went  out  of  the  studio  before 
any  one  had  time  to  answer  him. 

Perugino  was  furiously  angry  and  would  not 
listen  to  reason,  but  must  needs  go  before  the  great 
Council  and  demand  that  they  should  punish 
Michelangelo  for  his  hard  words.  This  of  course 
the  Council  refused  to  do,  and  Perugino  left 
Florence  for  Perugia,  angry  and  sore  at  heart. 

It  seemed  hard,  after  all  his  struggles  and  great 
successes,  that  as  he  grew  old  people  should  begin 
to  tire  of  his  work,  which  they  had  once  thought 
so  perfect. 

But  if  the  outside  world  was  sometimes  dis- 
appointing, he  had  always  his  home  to  turn  to,  and 
his  beautiful  wife  Chiare.  He  had  married  her  in 
his  beloved  Perugia,  and  she  meant  all  the  joy  of 
life  to  him.  He  was  so  proud  of  her  beauty  that  he 
would  buy  her  the  richest  dresses  and  most  costly 
jewels,  and  with  his  own  hands  would  deck  her  with 
them.  Her  brown  eyes  were  like  the  depths  of 
some  quiet  pool,  her  fair  face  and  the  wonderful 
soul  that  shone  there  were  to  him  the  most  perfect 
picture  in  the  world. 


PIETRO  PERUGINO  93 

'  I  will  paint  thee  once,  that  the  world  may  be  the 
richer,'  said  Perugino,  *  but  only  once,  for  thy 
beauty  is  too  rare  for  common  use.  And  I  will 
paint  thee  not  as  an  earthly  beauty,  but  thou  shalt 
be  the  angel  in  the  story  of  Tobias  which  thou 
knowest.' 

So  he  painted  her  as  he  said.  And  in  our  own 
National  Gallery  we  still  have  the  picture,  and  we 
may  see  her  there  as  the  beautiful  angel  who  leads 
the  little  boy  Tobias  by  the  hand. 

Up  to  the  very  last  years  of  his  life,  Perugino 
painted  as  diligently  as  he  had  ever  done,  but  the 
peaceful  days  of  Perugia  had  long  since  given  place 
to  war  and  tumult,  both  within  and  without  the 
city.  Then  too  a  terrible  plague  swept  over  the 
countryside,  and  people  died  by  thousands. 

To  the  hospital  of  Fartignano,  close  to  Perugia, 
they  carried  Perugino  when  the  deadly  plague  seized 
him,  and  there  he  died.  There  was  no  time  to  think 
of  grand  funerals  ;  the  people  were  buried  as  quickly 
as  possible,  in  whatever  place  lay  closest  at  hand. 

So  it  came  to  pass  that  Perugino  was  laid  to  rest 
in  an  open  field  under  an  oak-tree  close  by.  Later 
on  his  sons  wished  to  have  him  buried  in  holy 
ground,  and  some  say  that  this  was  done,  but 
nothing  is  known  for  certain.  Perhaps  if  he  could 
have  chosen,  he  would  have  been  glad  to  think  that 
his  body  should  rest  under  the  shelter  of  the  trees 
he  loved  to  paint,  in  that  waste  openness  of  space 
which  had  always  been  his  vision  of  beauty,  since, 
as  a  little  boy,  he  gazed  across  the  Umbrian  Plain, 
and  the  wonder  of  it  sank  into  his  soul. 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI 

ON  the  sunny  slopes  of  Monte  Albano,  between 
Florence  and  Pisa,  the  little  town  of  Vinci  lay  high 
among  the  rocks  that  crowned  the  steep  hillside.  It 
was  but  a  little  town.  Only  a  few  houses  crowded 
together  round  an  old  castle  in  the  midst,  and  it 
looked  from  a  distance  like  a  swallow's  nest  clinging 
to  the  bare  steep  rocks. 

Here  in  the  year  1452  Leonardo,  son  of  Ser  Piero 
da  Vinci,  was  born.  It  was  in  the  age  when  people 
told  fortunes  by  the  stars,  and  when  a  baby  was 
born  they  would  eagerly  look  up  and  decide  whether 
it  was  a  lucky  or  unlucky  star  which  shone  upon 
the  child.  Surely  if  it  had  been  possible  in  this  way 
to  tell  what  fortune  awaited  the  little  Leonardo,  a 
strange  new  star  must  have  shone  that  night, 
brighter  than  the  others  and  unlike  the  rest  in  the 
dazzling  light  of  its  strength  and  beauty. 

Leonardo  was  always  a  strange  child.  Even  his 
beauty  was  not  like  that  of  other  children.  He  had 
the  most  wonderful  waving  hair,  falling  in  regular 
ripples,  like  the  waters  of  a  fountain,  the  colour  of 
bright  gold,  and  soft  as  spun  silk.  His  eyes  were 
blue  and  clear,  with  a  mysterious  light  in  them,  not 
the  warm  light  of  a  sunny  sky,  but  rather  the  blue 
that  glints  in  the  iceberg.  They  were  merry  eyes 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  95 

too,  when  he  laughed,  but  underneath  was  always 
that  strange  cold  look.  There  was  a  charm  about 
his  smile  which  no  one  could  resist,  and  he  was  a 
favourite  with  all.  Yet  people  shook  their  heads 
sometimes  as  they  looked  at  him,  and  they  talked  in 
whispers  of  the  old  witch  who  had  lent  her  goat  to 
nourish  the  little  Leonardo  when  he  was  a  baby. 
The  woman  was  a  dealer  in  black  magic,  and  who 
knew  but  that  the  child  might  be  a  changeling  ? 

It  was  the  old  grandmother,  Mona  Lena,  who 
brought  Leonardo  up  and  spoilt  him  not  a  little. 
His  father,  Ser  Piero,  was  a  lawyer,  and  spent  most 
of  his  time  in  Florence,  but  when  he  returned  to  the 
old  castle  of  Vinci,  he  began  to  give  Leonardo 
lessons  and  tried  to  find  out  what  the  boy  was  fit  for. 
But  Leonardo  hated  those  lessons  and  would  not 
learn,  so  when  he  was  seven  years  old  he  was  sent  to 
school. 

This  did  not  answer  any  better.  The  rough  play 
of  the  boys  was  not  to  his  liking.  When  he  saw 
them  drag  the  wings  off  butterflies,  or  torture  any 
animal  that  fell  into  their  hands,  his  face  grew  white 
with  pain,  and  he  would  take  no  share  in  their 
games.  The  Latin  grammar,  too,  was  a  terrible  task, 
while  the  many  things  he  longed  to  know  no  one 
taught  him. 

So  it  happened  that  many  a  time,  instead  of  going 
to  school,  he  would  slip  away  and  escape  up  into  the 
hills,  as  happy  as  a  little  wild  goat.  Here  was  all 
the  sweet  fresh  air  of  heaven,  instead  of  the  stuffy 
schoolroom.  Here  were  no  cruel,  clumsy  boys,  but 
all  the  wild  creatures  that  he  loved.  Here  he  could 


96  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

learn  the  real  things  his  heart  was  hungry  to  know, 
not  merely  words  which  meant  nothing  and  led  to 
nowhere. 

For  hours  he  would  lie  perfectly  still  with  his 
heels  in  the  air  and  his  chin  resting  in  his  hands,  as 
he  watched  a  spider  weaving  its  web,  breathless  with 
interest  to  see  how  the  delicate  threads  were  turned 
in  and  out.  The  gaily  painted  butterflies,  the  fat 
buzzing  bees,  the  little  sharp-tongued  green  lizards, 
he  loved  to  watch  them  all,  but  above  everything  he 
loved  the  birds.  Oh,  if  only  he  too  had  wings  to 
dart  like  the  swallows,  and  swoop  and  sail  and  dart 
again  !  What  was  the  secret  power  in  their  wings  ? 
Surely  by  watching  he  might  learn  it.  Sometimes 
it  seemed  as  if  his  heart  would  burst  with  the  long- 
ing to  learn  that  secret.  It  was  always  the  hidden 
reason  of  things  that  he  desired  to  know.  Much  as 
he  loved  the  flowers  he  must  pull  their  petals  off,  one 
by  one,  to  see  how  each  was  joined,  to  wonder  at  the 
dusty  pollen,  and  touch  the  honey-covered  stamens. 
Then  when  the  sun  began  to  sink  he  would  turn 
sadly  homewards,  very  hungry,  with  torn  clothes  and 
tired  feet,  but  with  a  store  of  sunshine  in  his  heart. 

His  grandmother  shook  her  head  when  Leonardo 
appeared  after  one  of  his  days  of  wandering. 

<I  know  thou  shouldst  be  whipped  for  play  ing- 
truant,'  she  said  ;  '  and  I  should  also  punish  thee  for 
tearing  thy  clothes.' 

*  Ah !  but  thou  wilt  not  whip  me,'  answered  Leo- 
nardo, smiling  at  her  with  his  curious  quiet  smile, 
for  he  had  full  confidence  in  her  love. 

*  Well,  I  love  to  see  thee  happy,  and  I  will  not 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  97 

punish  thee  this  time,'  said  his  grandmother ;  '  but 
if  these  tales  reach  thy  father's  ears,  he  will  not  be 
so  tender  as  I  am  towards  thee.' 

And,  sure  enough,  the  very  next  time  that  a  com- 
plaint was  made  from  the  school,  his  father  happened 
to  be  at  home,  and  then  the  storm  burst. 

'  Next  time  I  will  flog  thee,'  said  Ser  Piero  sternly, 
with  rising  anger  at  the  careless  air  of  the  boy. 
'  Meanwhile  we  will  see  what  a  little  imprisonment 
will  do  towards  making  thee  a  better  child.' 

Then  he  took  the  boy  by  the  shoulders  and  led 
him  to  a  little  dark  cupboard  under  the  stairs,  and 
there  shut  him  up  for  three  whole  days. 

There  was  no  kicking  or  beating  at  the  locked 
door.  Leonardo  sat  quietly  there  in  the  dark,  thinking 
his  own  thoughts,  and  wondering  why  there  seemed 
so  little  justice  in  the  world.  But  soon  even  that 
wonder  passed  away,  and  as  usual  when  he  was  alone 
he  began  to  dream  dreams  of  the  time  when  he 
should  have  learned  the  swallows'  secrets  and  should 
have  wings  like  theirs. 

But  if  there  were  complaints  about  Leonardo's 
dislike  of  the  boys  and  the  Latin  grammar,  there 
would  be  none  about  the  lessons  he  chose  to  learn. 
Indeed,  some  of  the  masters  began  to  dread  the  boy's 
eager  questions,  which  were  sometimes  more  than 
they  could  answer.  Scarcely  had  he  begun  the 
study  of  arithmetic  than  he  made  such  rapid  pro- 
gress, and  wanted  to  puzzle  out  so  many  problems, 
that  the  masters  were  amazed.  His  mind  seemed 
always  eagerly  asking  for  more  light,  and  was  never 
satisfied. 

6 


98  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

But  it  was  out  on  the  hillside  that  he  spent  his 
happiest  hours.  He  loved  every  crawling,  creeping, 
or  flying  thing,  however  ugly.  Curious  beasts  which 
might  have  frightened  another  child  were  to  him 
charming  and  interesting.  There  as  he  listened  to 
the  carolling  of  the  birds  and  bent  his  head  to  catch 
the  murmured  song  of  the  mountain-streams,  the 
love  of  music  began  to  steal  into  his  heart. 

He  did  not  rest  then  until  he  managed  to  get  a 
lute  and  learned  how  to  play  upon  it.  And  when  he 
had  mastered  the  notes  and  learned  the  rules  of 
music,  he  began  to  play  airs  which  no  one  had  ever 
heard  before,  and  to  sing  such  strange  sweet  songs 
that  the  golden  notes  flowed  out  as  fresh  and  clear 
as  the  song  of  a  lark  in  the  early  morning  of  spring. 

*  The  child  is  a  changeling,'  said  some,  as  they 
saw  Leonardo  tenderly  lift  a  crushed  lizard  in  his 
hand,  or  watched  him  play  with  a  spotted  snake  or 
great  hairy  spider. 

'  A  changeling  perhaps,'  said  others,  '  but  one  that 
hath  the  voice  of  an  angel.'  For  every  one  stopped 
to  listen  when  the  boy's  voice  was  heard  singing 
through  the  streets  of  the  little  town. 

He  was  a  puzzle  to  every  one,  and  yet  a  delight 
to  all,  even  when  they  understood  him  least. 

So  time  went  on,  and  when  Leonardo  was  thirteen 
his  father  took  him  away  to  Florence  that  he  might 
begin  to  be  trained  for  some  special  work.  But 
what  work  ?  Ah !  that  was  the  rub.  The  boy 
could  do  so  many  things  well  that  it  was  difficult  to 
fix  on  one. 

At  that  time  there  was  living  in  Florence  an  old 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  99 

man  who  knew  a  great  deal  about  the  stars,  and  who 
made  wonderful  calculations  about  them.  He  was 
a  famous  astronomer,  but  he  cared  not  at  all  for 
honour  or  fame,  but  lived  a  simple  quiet  life  by  him- 
self and  would  not  mix  with  the  gay  world. 

Few  visitors  ever  came  to  see  him,  for  it  was  known 
that  he  would  receive  no  one,  and  so  it  was  a  great 
surprise  to  old  Toscanelli  when  one  night  a  gentle 
knock  sounded  at  his  door,  and  a  boy  walked  quietly 
in  and  stood  before  him. 

Hastily  the  old  man  looked  up,  and  his  first 
thought  was  to  ask  the  child  how  he  dared  enter 
without  leave,  and  then  ask  him  to  be  gone,  but  as 
he  looked  at  the  fair  face  he  felt  the  charm  of  the 
curious  smile,  and  the  light  in  the  blue  eyes,  and  in- 
stead he  laid  his  hand  upon  the  boy's  golden  head 
and  said  :  '  What  dost  thou  seek,  my  son  ? ' 

*  I  would  learn  all  that  thou  canst  teach  me,'  said 
Leonardo,  for  it  was  he. 

The  old  man  smiled. 

'  Behold  the  boundless  self-confidence  of  youth  1 ' 
he  said. 

But  as  they  talked  together,  and  the  boy  asked  his 
many  eager  questions,  a  great  wonder  awoke  in  the 
astronomer's  mind,  and  his  eyes  shone  with  interest. 
This  child-mind  held  depths  of  understanding  such 
as  he  had  never  met  with  among  his  learned  friends. 
Day  after  day  the  old  man  and  the  boy  bent  eagerly 
together  over  their  problems,  and  when  night  fell 
Toscanelli  would  take  the  child  up  with  him  to  his 
lonely  tower  above  Florence,  and  teach  him  to  know 
the  stars  and  to  understand  many  things. 


100  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

'  This  is  all  very  well/  said  Ser  Piero,  '  but  the  boy 
must  do  more  than  mere  star-gazing.  He  must  earn 
a  living  for  himself,  and  methinks  we  might  make  a 
painter  of  him.' 

That  very  day,  therefore,  he  gathered  together 
some  of  Leonardo's  drawings  which  lay  carelessly 
scattered  about,  and  took  them  to  the  studio  of 
Verocchio  the  painter,  who  lived  close  by  the  Ponte 
Vecchio. 

'  Dost  thou  think  thou  canst  make  aught  of  the 
boy  ? '  he  asked,  spreading  out  the  drawings  before 
Verocchio. 

The  painter's  quick  eyes  examined  the  work  with 
deep  interest. 

'  Send  him  to  me  at  once,'  he  said.  *  This  is 
indeed  marvellous  talent.' 

So  Leonardo  entered  the  studio  as  a  pupil,  and 
learned  all  that  could  be  taught  him  with  the  same 
quickness  with  which  he  learned  anything  that  he 
cared  to  know. 

Every  one  who  saw  his  work  declared  that  he 
would  be  the  wonder  of  the  age,  but  Verocchio 
shook  his  head. 

'  He  is  too  wonderful,'  he  said.  '  He  aims  at  too 
great  perfection.  He  wants  to  know  everything 
and  do  everything,  and  life  is  too  short  for  that. 
He  finishes  nothing,  because  he  is  ever  starting  to 
do  something  else.' 

Verocchio's  words  were  true ;  the  boy  seldom 
worked  long  at  one  thing.  His  hands  were  never 
idle,  and  often,  instead  of  painting,  he  would  carve 
out  tiny  windmills  and  curious  toys  which  worked 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  101 

with  pulleys  and  ropes,  or  made  exquisite  little  clay 
models  of  horses  and  all  the  other  animals  that  he 
loved.  But  he  never  forgot  the  longing  that  had 
rilled  his  heart  when  he  was  a  child — the  desire  to 
learn  the  secret  of  flying. 

For  days  he  would  sit  idle  and  think  of  nothing 
but  soaring  wings,  then  he  would  rouse  himself  and 
begin  to  make  some  strange  machine  which  he 
thought  might  hold  the  secret  that  he  sought. 

'  A  waste  of  time,'  growled  Verocchio.  '  See  here, 
thou  wouldst  be  better  employed  if  thou  shouldst 
set  to  work  and  help  me  finish  this  picture  of  the 
Baptism  for  the  good  monks  of  Vallambrosa.  Let 
me  see  how  thou  canst  paint  in  the  kneeling  figure 
of  the  angel  at  the  side.' 

For  a  while  the  boy  stood  motionless  before  the 
picture  as  if  he  was  looking  at  something  far  away. 
Then  he  seized  the  brushes  with  his  left  hand  and 
began  to  paint  with  quick  certain  sweep.  He 
never  stopped  to  think,  but  worked  as  if  the  angel 
were  already  there,  and  he  were  but  brushing  away 
the  veil  that  hid  it  from  the  light. 

Then,  when  it  was  done,  the  master  came  and 
looked  silently  on.  For  a  moment  a  quick  stab  of 
jealousy  ran  through  his  heart.  Year  after  year 
had  he  worked  and  striven  to  reach  his  ideal.  Long- 
days  of  toil  and  weary  nights  had  he  spent,  winning 
each  step  upwards  by  sheer  hard  work.  And  here 
was  this  boy  without  an  effort  able  to  rise  far  above 
him.  All  the  knowledge  which  the  master  had 
groped  after,  had  been  grasped  at  once  by  the 
wonderful  mind  of  the  pupil.  But  the  envious 


102  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

feeling  passed  quickly  away,  and  Verocchio  laid  his 
hand  upon  Leonardo's  shoulder. 

'  I  have  found  my  master,'  he  said  quietly,  *  and 
I  will  paint  no  more.' 

Leonardo  scarcely  seemed  to  hear  ;  he  was  think- 
ing of  something  else  now,  and  he  seldom  noticed 
if  people  praised  or  blamed  him.  His  thoughts  had 
fixed  themselves  upon  something  he  had  seen  that 
morning  which  had  troubled  him.  On  the  way  to 
the  studio  he  had  passed  a  tiny  shop  in  a  narrow 
street  where  a  seller  of  birds  was  busy  hanging  his 
cages  up  on  the  nails  fastened  to  the  outside  wall. 

The  thought  of  those  poor  little  prisoners  beating 
their  wings  against  the  cruel  bars  and  breaking  their 
hearts  with  longing  for  their  wild  free  life,  had 
haunted  him  all  day,  and  now  he  could  bear  it  no 
longer.  He  seized  his  cap  and  hurried  off,  all  for- 
getful of  his  kneeling  angel  and  the  master's 
praise. 

He  reached  the  little  shop  and  called  to  the  man 
within. 

'  How  much  wilt  thou  take  for  thy  birds  ? '  he 
cried,  and  pointed  to  the  little  wooden  cages  that 
hung  against  the  wall. 

'  Plague  on  them,'  answered  the  man,  '  they  will 
often  die  before  I  can  make  a  sale  by  them.  Thou 
canst  have  them  all  for  one  silver  piece.' 

In  a  moment  Leonardo  had  paid  the  money  and 
had  turned  towards  the  row  of  little  cages,  One 
by  one  he  opened  the  doors  and  set  the  prisoners 
free,  and  those  that  were  too  frightened  or  timid  to 
fly  away,  he  gently  drew  out  with  his  hand,  and  sent 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  103 

them  gaily  whirling  up  above  his  head  into  the  blue 
sky. 

The  man  looked  with  blank  astonishment  at  the 
empty  cages,  and  wondered  if  the  handsome  young 
man  was  mad.  But  Leonardo  paid  no  heed  to  him, 
but  stood  gazing  up  until  every  one  of  the  birds 
had  disappeared. 

'  Happy  things,'  he  said,  with  a  sigh.  '  Will  you 
ever  teach  me  the  secret  of  your  wings,  I  wonder  ? ' 

It  was  with  great  pleasure  that  Ser  Piero  heard  of 
his  son's  success  at  Verocchio's  studio,  and  he  began 
to  have  hopes  that  the  boy  would  make  a  name  for 
himself  after  all.  It  happened  just  then  that  he  was 
on  a  visit  to  his  castle  at  Vinci,  and  one  morning  a 
peasant  who  lived  on  the  estate  came  to  ask  a  great 
favour  of  him. 

He  had  bought  a  rough  wooden  shield  which  he 
was  very  anxious  should  have  a  design  painted  on 
it  in  Florence,  and  he  begged  Ser  Piero  to  see  that 
it  was  done.  The  peasant  was  a  faithful  servant, 
and  very  useful  in  supplying  the  castle  with  fish  and 
game,  so  Ser  Piero  was  pleased  to  grant  him  his 
request. 

1  Leonardo  shall  try  his  hand  upon  it.  It  is  time 
he  became  useful  to  me,'  said  Ser  Piero  to  himself. 
So  on  his  return  to  Florence  he  took  the  shield  to 
his  son. 

It  was  a  rough,  badly-shaped  shield,  so  Leonardo 
held  it  to  the  fire  and  began  to  straighten  it.  For 
though  his  hands  looked  delicate  and  beautifully 
formed,  they  were  as  strong  as  steel,  and  he  could 
bend  bars  of  iron  without  an  effort.  Then  he  sent 


104  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

the  shield  to  a  turner  to  be  smoothed  and  rounded, 
and  when  it  was  ready  he  sat  down  to  think  what 
he  should  paint  upon  it,  for  he  loved  to  draw  strange 
monsters. 

'  I  will  make  it  as  terrifying  as  the  head  of 
Medusa,'  he  said  at  last,  highly  delighted  with  the 
plan  that  had  come  into  his  head. 

Then  he  went  out  and  collected  together  all  the 
strangest  animals  he  could  find — lizards,  hedgehogs, 
newts,  snakes,  dragon-flies,  locusts,  bats,  and  glow- 
worms. These  he  took  into  his  own  room,  which 
no  one  was  allowed  to  enter,  and  began  to  paint  from 
them  a  curious  monster,  partly  a  lizard  and  partly 
a  bat,  with  something  of  each  of  the  other  animals 
added  to  it. 

When  it  was  ready  Leonardo  hung  the  shield  in 
a  good  light  against  a  dark  curtain,  so  that  the 
painted  monster  stood  out  in  brilliant  contrast,  and 
looked  as  if  its  twisted  curling  limbs  were  full  of  life. 

A  knock  sounded  at  the  door,  and  Ser  Piero's 
voice  was  heard  outside  asking  if  the  shield  was 
finished. 

'  Come  in,'  cried  Leonardo,  and  Ser  Piero 
entered. 

He  cast  one  look  at  the  monster  hanging  there 
and  then  uttered  a  cry  and  turned  to  flee,  but 
Leonardo  caught  hold  of  his  cloak  and  laughingly 
told  him  to  look  closer. 

'  If  I  have  really  succeeded  in  frightening  thee,' 
he  said,  *  I  have  indeed  done  all  I  could  desire.' 

His  father  could  scarcely  believe  that  it  was 
nothing  but  a  painting,  and  he  was  so  proud  of  the 


1  1 

>  5 

4  E 

-  - 

a;  ;: 

y-  :, 


?  I 


TTJ  IT     T-T  P 


n  D     FOUND/ 


I  C 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  105 

work  that  he  would  not  part  with  it,  but  gave  the 
peasant  of  Vinci  another  shield  instead. 

Leonardo  then  began  a  drawing  for  a  curtain 
which  was  to  be  woven  in  silk  and  gold  and  given 
as  a  present  from  the  Florentines  to  the  King  of 
Portugal,  and  he  also  began  a  large  picture  of  the 
Adoration  of  the  Shepherds  which  was  never 
finished. 

The  young  painter  grew  restless  after  a  while,  and 
felt  the  life  of  the  studio  narrow  and  cramped. 
He  longed  to  leave  Florence  and  find  work  in  some 
new  place. 

He  was  not  a  favourite  at  the  court  of  Lorenzo 
the  Magnificent  as  Filippino  Lippi  and  Botticelli 
were.  Lorenzo  liked  those  who  would  flatter  him 
and  do  as  they  were  bid,  while  Leonardo  took  his 
own  way  in  everything  and  never  said  what  he  did 
not  mean. 

But  it  happened  that  just  then  Lorenzo  wished 
to  send  a  present  to  Ludovico  Sforza,  the  Duke  of 
Milan,  and  the  gift  he  chose  was  a  marvellous 
musical  instrument  which  Leonardo  had  just 
finished. 

It  was  a  silver  lute,  made  in  the  form  of  a  horse's 
head,  the  most  curious  and  beautiful  thing  ever  seen. 
Lorenzo  was  charmed  with  it. 

'  Thou  shalt  take  it  thyself,  as  my  messenger,'  he 
said  to  Leonardo.  '  I  doubt  if  another  can  be  found 
who  can  play  upon  it  as  thou  dost.' 

So  Leonardo  set  out  for  Milan,  and  was  glad  to 
shake  himself  free  from  the  narrow  life  of  the 
Florentine  studio. 


106  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Before  starting,  however,  he  had  written  a  letter 
to  the  Duke  setting  down  in  simple  order  all  the 
things  he  could  do,  and  telling  of  what  use  he  could 
be  in  times  of  war  and  in  days  of  peace. 

There  seemed  nothing  that  he  could  not  do.  He 
could  make  bridges,  blow  up  castles,  dig  canals, 
invent  a  new  kind  of  cannon,  build  warships,  and 
make  underground  passages.  In  days  of  peace  he 
could  design  and  build  houses,  make  beautiful 
statues  and  paint  pictures  '  as  well  as  any  man,  be 
he  who  he  may.' 

The  letter  was  written  in  curious  writing  from 
right  to  left  like  Hebrew  or  Arabic.  This  was  how 
Leonardo  always  wrote,  using  his  left  hand,  so  that 
it  could  only  be  read  by  holding  the  writing  up  to 
a  mirror. 

The  Duke  was  half  amazed  and  half  amused  when 
the  letter  reached  him. 

'  Either  these  are  the  words  of  a  fool,  or  of  a  man 
of  genius,'  said  the  Duke.  And  when  he  had  once 
seen  and  spoken  to  Leonardo  he  saw  at  once  which 
of  the  two  he  deserved  to  be  called. 

Every  one  at  the  court  was  charmed  with  the 
artist's  beautiful  face  and  graceful  manners.  His 
music  alone,  as  he  swept  the  strings  of  the  silver 
lute  and  sang  to  it  his  own  songs,  would  have 
brought  him  fame,  but  the  Duke  quickly  saw  that 
this  was  no  mere  minstrel. 

It  was  soon  arranged  therefore  that  Leonardo 
should  take  up  his  abode  at  the  court  of  Milan 
and  receive  a  yearly  pension  from  the  Duke. 

Sometimes  the  pension  was  paid,  and  sometimes 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  107 

it  was  forgotten,  but  Leonardo  never  troubled  about 
money  matters.  Somehow  or  other  he  must  have 
all  that  he  wanted,  and  everything  must  be  fair 
and  dainty.  His  clothes  were  always  rich  and 
costly,  but  never  bright- coloured  or  gaudy.  There 
was  no  plume  or  jewelled  brooch  in  his  black  velvet 
beretto  or  cap,  and  the  only  touch  of  colour  was 
his  golden  hair,  and  the  mantle  of  dark  red  cloth  , 
which  he  wore  in  the  fashion  of  the  Florentines, 
thrown  across  his  shoulder.  Above  all,  he  must 
always  have  horses  in  his  stables,  for  he  loved  them 
more  than  human  beings. 

Many  were  the  plans  and  projects  which  the 
Duke  entrusted  to  Leonardo's  care,  but  of  all  that 
he  did,  two  great  works  stand  out  as  greater  than 
all  the  rest.  One  was  the  painting  of  the  Last 
Supper  on  the  walls  of  the  refectory  of  Santa  Maria 
delle  Grazie,  and  the  other  the  making  of  a  model 
of  a  great  equestrian  statue,  a  bronze  horse  with 
the  figure  of  the  Duke  upon  its  back. 

Year  after  year  Leonardo  worked  at  that  wonder- 
ful fresco  of  the  Last  Supper.  Sometimes  for  weeks 
or  months  he  never  touched  it,  but  he  always 
returned  to  it  again.  Then  for  days  he  would 
work  from  morning  till  night,  scarcely  taking  time 
to  eat,  and  able  to  think  of  nothing  else,  until 
suddenly  he  would  put  down  his  brushes  and  stand 
silently  for  a  long,  long  time  before  the  picture. 
It  seemed  as  if  he  was  wasting  the  precious  hours 
doing  nothing,  but  in  truth  he  worked  more 
diligently  with  his  brain  when  his  hands  were  idle. 

Often  too  when  he  worked  at  the  model  for  the 


108  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

great  bronze  horse,  he  would  suddenly  stop,  and 
walk  quickly  through  the  streets  until  he  came  to 
the  refectory,  and  there,  catching  up  his  brushes, 
he  would  paint  in  one  or  perhaps  two  strokes,  and 
then  return  to  his  modelling. 

Besides  all  this  Leonardo  was  busy  with  other 
plans  for  the  Duke's  amusement,  and  no  court  fete 
was  counted  successful  without  his  help.  Nothing 
seemed  too  difficult  for  him  to  contrive,  and  what 
he  did  was  always  new  and  strange  and  wonderful. 

Once  when  the  King  of  France  came  as  a  guest 
to  Milan,  Leonardo  prepared  a  curious  model  of  a 
lion,  which  by  some  inside  machinery  was  able  to 
walk  forward  several  steps  to  meet  the  King,  and 
then  open  wide  its  huge  jaws  and  display  inside  a 
bed  of  sweet-scented  lilies,  the  emblem  of  France, 
to  do  honour  to  her  King.  But  while  working  at 
other  things  Leonardo  never  forgot  his  longing 
to  learn  the  secret  art  of  flying.  Every  now  and 
then  a  new  idea  would  come  into  his  head,  and  he 
would  lay  aside  all  other  work  until  he  had  made 
the  new  machine  which  might  perhaps  act  as  the 
wings  of  a  bird.  Each  fresh  disappointment  only 
made  him  more  keen  to  try  again. 

'  I  know  we  shall  some  day  have  wings,'  he  said 
to  his  pupils,  who  sometimes  wondered  at  the 
strange  work  of  the  master's  hands.  '  It  is  only  a 
question  of  knowing  how  to  make  them.  I  re- 
member once  when  I  was  a  baby  lying  in  my 
cradle,  I  fancied  a  bird  flew  to  me,  opened  my  lips 
and  rubbed  its  feathers  over  them.  So  it  seems  to 
be  my  fate  all  my  life  to  talk  of  wings.' 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  109 

Very  slowly  the  great  fresco  of  the  Last  Supper 
grew  under  the  master's  hand  until  it  was  nearly 
finished.  The  statue,  too,  was  almost  completed, 
and  then  evil  days  fell  upon  Milan.  The  Duke  was 
obliged  to  flee  before  the  French  soldiers,  who 
forced  their  way  into  the  town  and  took  possession 
of  it.  Before  any  one  could  prevent  it,  the  soldiers 
began  to  shoot  their  arrows  at  the  great  statue, 
which  they  used  as  a  target,  and  in  a  few  hours  the 
work  of  sixteen  years  was  utterly  destroyed.  It  is 
sadder  still  to  tell  the  fate  of  Leonardo's  fresco,  the 
greatest  picture  perhaps  that  ever  was  painted. 
Dampness  lurked  in  the  wall  and  began  to  dim  and 
blur  the  colours.  The  careless  monks  cut  a  door 
through  the  very  centre  of  the  picture,  and,  later  on, 
when  Napoleon's  soldiers  entered  Milan,  they  used 
the  refectory  as  a  stable,  and  amused  themselves  by 
throwing  stones  at  what  remained  of  it.  But  though 
little  of  it  is  left  now  to  be  seen,  there  is  still  enough 
to  make  us  stand  in  awe  and  reverence  before  the 
genius  of  the  great  master. 

Not  far  from  Milan  there  lived  a  friend  of 
Leonardo's,  whom  the  master  loved  to  visit.  This 
Girolamo  Melzi  had  a  son  called  Francesco,  a  little 
motherless  boy,  who  adored  the  great  painter  with 
all  his  heart. 

Together  Leonardo  and  the  child  used  to  wander 
out  to  search  for  curious  animals  and  rare  flowers, 
and  as  they  watched  the  spiders  weave  their  webs 
and  pulled  the  flowers  to  pieces  to  find  out  their 
secrets,  the  boy  listened  with  wide  wondering  eyes 
to  all  the  tales  which  the  painter  told  him.  And 


110  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

at  night  Leonardo  wrapped  the  little  one  close 
inside  his  warm  cloak  and  carried  him  out  to  see 
the  stars — those  same  stars  which  old  Toscanelli  had 
taught  him  to  love  long  ago  in  Florence.  Then 
when  the  day  of  parting  came  the  child  clung 
round  the  master's  neck  and  would  not  let  him  go. 

'  Take  me  with  thee,'  he  cried,  '  do  not  leave  me 
behind  all  alone.' 

*  I  cannot  take  thee  now,  little  one,'  said  Leo- 
nardo gently.  'Thou  art  still  too  small,  but  later 
on  thou  shalt  come  to  me  and  be  my  pupil.  This  I 
promise  thee.' 

It  was  but  a  weary  wandering  life  that  awaited 
Leonardo  after  he  was  forced  to  leave  his  home 
in  Milan.  It  seemed  as  if  it  was  his  fate  to  begin 
many  things  but  to  finish  nothing.  For  a  while 
he  lived  in  Rome,  but  he  did  little  real  work  there. 

For  several  years  he  lived  in  Florence  and  began 
to  paint  a  huge  battle-picture.  There  too  he  painted 
the  famous  portrait  of  Mona  Lisa,  which  is  now  in 
Paris.  Of  all  portraits  that  have  ever  been  painted 
this  is  counted  the  most  wonderful  and  perfect 
piece  of  work,  although  Leonardo  himself  called  it 
unfinished. 

By  this  time  the  master  had  fallen  on  evil  days. 
All  his  pupils  were  gone,  and  his  friends  seemed  to 
have  forgotten  him.  He  was  sitting  before  the 
fire  one  stormy  night,  lonely  and  sad,  when  the 
door  opened  and  a  tall  handsome  lad  came  in. 

'  Master ! '  he  cried,  and  kneeling  down  he  kissed 
the  old  man's  hands.  'Dost  thou  not  know  me? 
I  am  thy  little  Francesco,  come  to  claim  thy 


LEONARDO  DA  VINCI  111 

promise  that  I  should  one  day  be  thy  servant  and 
pupil. ' 

Leonardo  laid  his  hand  upon  the  boy's  fair  head 
and  looked  into  his  face. 

*  I  am  growing  old,'  he  said,  *  and  I  can  no  longer 
do  for  thee  what  I  might  once  have  done.     I  am 
but  a  poor  wanderer  now.     Dost  thou  indeed  wish 
to  cast  in  thy  lot  with  mine  ? ' 

*  I  care  only  to  be  near  thee,'  said  the  boy.     '  I 
will  go  with  thee  to  the  ends  of  the  earth.' 

So  when,  soon  after,  Leonardo  received  an  in- 
vitation from  the  new  King  of  France,  he  took  the 
boy  with  him,  and  together  they  made  their  home 
in  the  little  chateau  of  Claux  near  the  town  of 
Amboise. 

The  master's  hair  was  silvered  now,  and  his  long 
beard  was  as  white  as  snow.  His  keen  blue  eyes 
looked  weary  and  tired  of  life,  and  care  had  drawn 
many  deep  lines  on  his  beautiful  face.  Sad  thoughts 
were  always  his  company.  The  one  word  '  failure ' 
seemed  to  be  written  across  his  life.  What  had 
he  done?  He  had  begun  many  things  and  had 
finished  but  few.  His  great  fresco  was  even  now 
fueling  away  and  becoming  dim  and  blurred.  His 
model  for  the  marvellous  horse  was  destroyed.  A 
few  pictures  remained,  but  these  had  never  quite 
reached  his  ideal.  The  crowd  who  had  once  hailed 
him  as  the  greatest  of  all  artists,  could  now  only 
talk  of  Michelangelo  and  the  young  Raphael. 
Michelangelo  himself  had  once  scornfully  told  him 
he  was  a  failure  and  could  finish  nothing. 

He  was  glad  to  leave  Italy  and  all  its  memories 


112  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

behind,  and  he  hoped  to  begin  work  again  in  his 
quiet  little  French  home.  But  Death  was  drawing 
near,  and  before  many  years  had  passed  he  grew  too 
weak  to  hold  a  brush  or  pencil. 

It  was  in  the  springtime  of  the  year  that  the 
end  came.  Francesco  had  opened  the  window  and 
gently  lifted  the  master  in  his  strong  young  arms, 
that  he  might  look  once  more  on  the  outside  world 
which  he  loved  so  dearly.  The  trees  were  putting 
on  their  dainty  dress  of  tender  green,  white  clouds 
swept  across  the  blue  sky,  and  April  sunshine 
flooded  the  room. 

As  he  looked  out,  the  master's  tired  eyes  woke 
into  life. 

'  Look  1 '  he  cried,  *  the  swallows  have  come 
back !  Oh  that  they  would  lend  me  their  wings 
that  I  might  fly  away  and  be  at  rest ! ' 

The  swallows  darted  and  circled  about  in  the 
clear  spring  air,  busy  with  their  building  plans,  but 
Francesco  thought  he  heard  the  rustle  of  other 
wings,  as  the  master's  soul,  freed  from  the  tired 
body,  was  at  last  borne  upwards  higher  than  any 
earthly  wings  could  soar. 


RAPHAEL 

AMONG  the  marvellous  tales  of  the  Arabian  Nights, 
there  is  a  story  told  of  a  band  of  robbers  who,  by 
whispering  certain  magic  words,  were  able  to  open 
the  door  of  a  secret  cave  where  treasures  of  gold  and 
silver  and  precious  jewels  lay  hid.  Now,  although 
the  day  of  such  delightful  marvels  is  past  and  gone, 
yet  there  still  remains  a  certain  magic  in  some 
names  which  is  able  to  open  the  secret  doors  of  the 
hidden  haunts  of  beauty  and  delight. 

For  most  people  the  very  name  of  *  Raphael '  is 
like  the  '  Open  Sesame '  of  the  robber  chief  in  the 
old  story.  In  a  moment  a  door  seems  to  open  out 
of  the  commonplace  everyday  world,  and  through  it 
they  see  a  stretch  of  fair  sweet  country.  There 
their  eyes  rest  upon  gentle,  dark-eyed  Madonnas, 
who  smile  down  lovingly  upon  the  heavenly  Child, 
playing  at  her  side  or  resting  in  her  arms.  The 
little  St.  John  is  also  there,  companion  of  the  Infant 
Christ;  rosy,  round-limbed  children  both,  half 
human  and  half  divine.  And  standing  in  the  back- 
ground are  a  crowd  of  grave,  quiet  figures,  each  one 
alive  with  interest,  while  over  all  there  is  a  glow  of 
intense  vivid  colour. 

We  know  but  little  of  the  everyday  life  of  this 
great  artist.  When  we  hear  his  name,  it  is  of  his 

H 


114  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

different  pictures  that  we  think  at  once,  for  they 
are  world-famous.  We  almost  forget  the  man  as 
we  gaze  at  his  work. 

It  was  in  the  little  village  of  Urbino,  in  Umbria, 
that  Raphael  was  born.  His  father  was  a  painter 
called  Giovanni  Santi,  and  from  him  Raphael  in- 
herited his  love  of  Art.  His  mother,  Magia,  was  a 
sweet,  gracious  woman,  and  the  little  Raphael  was 
like  her  in  character  and  beauty.  It  seemed  as  if 
the  boy  had  received  every  good  gift  that  Nature 
could  bestow.  He  had  a  lovely  oval  face,  and  soft 
dark  eyes  that  shone  with  a  beauty  that  was  more 
of  heaven  than  earth,  and  told  of  a  soul  which  was  as 
pure  and  lovely  as  his  face.  Above  all,  he  had  the 
gift  of  making  every  one  love  him,  so  that  his  should 
have  been  a  happy  sunshiny  life. 

But  no  one  can  ever  escape  trouble,  and  when 
Raphael  was  only  eight  years  old,  the  first  cloud 
overspread  his  sky.  His  mother  died,  and  soon 
after  his  father  married  again. 

The  new  mother  was  very  young,  and  did  not 
care  much  for  children,  but  Raphael  did  not  mind 
that  as  long  as  he  could  be  with  his  father.  But 
three  years  later  a  blacker  cloud  arose  and  blotted 
out  the  sunshine  from  his  life,  for  his  father  too  died, 
and  left  him  all  alone. 

The  boy  had  loved  his  father  dearly,  and  it  had 
been  his  great  delight  to  be  with  him  in  the  studio, 
to  learn  to  grind  and  mix  the  colours  and  watch 
those  wonderful  pictures  grow  from  day  to  day. 

But  now  all  was  changed.  The  quiet  studio  rang 
with  angry  voices,  and  the  peaceful  home  was  the 


Drawing  by  RAPHAEL 
"Round-limbed  rosy  ci  '  vine' 


TIE 


PU 


ASTQR, 


AND 


O 


RAPHAEL  115 

scene  of  continual  quarrelling.  Who  was  to  have 
the  money,  and  how  were  the  Santi  estates  to  be 
divided  ?  Stepmother  and  uncle  wrangled  from 
morning  until  night,  and  no  one  gave  a  thought  to 
the  child  Raphael.  It  was  only  the  money  that 
mattered. 

Then  when  it  seemed  that  the  boy's  training  was 
going  to  be  totally  neglected,  kindly  help  arrived. 
Simone  di  Ciarla,  brother  of  Raphael's  own  mother, 
came  to  look  after  his  little  nephew,  and  ere  long 
carried  him  off  from  the  noisy,  quarrelsome  house- 
hold, and  took  him  to  Perugia. 

'  Thou  shalt  have  the  best  teaching  in  all  Italy/ 
said  Simone  as  they  walked  through  the  streets  of 
the  town.  '  The  great  master  to  whose  studio  we 
go,  can  hold  his  own  even  among  the  artists  of 
Florence.  See  that  thou  art  diligent  to  learn  all 
that  he  can  teach  thee,  so  that  thou  mayest  become 
as  great  a  painter  as  thy  father. ' 

*  Am  I  to  be  the  pupil  of  the  great  Perugino  ? ' 
asked  Raphael,  his  eyes  shining  with  pleasure.  *  I 
have  often  heard  my  father  speak  of  his  marvellous 
pictures.' 

'  We  will  see  if  he  can  take  thee,'  answered  his 
uncle. 

The  boy's  heart  sunk.  What  if  the  master  refused 
to  take  him  as  a  pupil  ?  Must  he  return  to  idleness 
and  the  place  which  was  no  longer  home  ? 

But  soon  his  fears  were  set  at  rest.  Perugino, 
like  every  one  else,  felt  the  charm  of  that  beautiful 
face  and  gentle  manner,  and  when  he  had  seen  some 
drawings  which  the  boy  had  done,  he  agreed  readily 


116  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

that  Raphael  should  enter  the  studio  and  become 
his  pupil. 

Perugia  had  been  passing  through  evil  times 
just  before  this.  The  two  great  parties  of  the  Oddi 
and  Baglioni  families  were  always  at  war  together. 
Whichever  of  them  happened  to  be  the  stronger 
held  the  city  and  drove  out  the  other  party,  so  that 
the  fighting  never  ceased  either  inside  or  outside 
the  gates.  The  peaceful  country  round  about  had 
been  laid  waste  and  desolate.  The  peasants  did 
not  dare  go  out  to  till  their  fields  or  prune  their 
olive-trees.  Mothers  were  afraid  to  let  their 
little  ones  out  of  their  sight,  for  hungry  wolves 
and  other  wild  beasts  prowled  about  the  deserted 
countryside. 

Then  came  a  day  when  the  outside  party 
managed  to  creep  silently  into  the  city,  and  the 
most  terrible  fight  of  all  began.  So  long  and 
fiercely  did  the  battle  rage  that  almost  all  the  Oddi 
were  killed.  Then  for  a  time  there  was  peace  in 
Perugia  and  all  the  country  round. 

So  it  happened  that  as  soon  as  the  people  of 
Perugia  had  time  to  think  of  other  things  besides 
fighting,  they  began  to  wish  that  their  town  might 
be  put  in  order,  and  that  the  buildings  which  had 
been  injured  during  the  struggles  might  be  re- 
stored. 

This  was  a  good  opportunity  for  peaceful  men 
like  Perugino,  for  there  was  much  work  to  be  done, 
and  both  he  and  his  pupils  were  kept  busy  from 
morning  till  night. 

Of  all   his   pupils,   Perugino   loved   the   young 


RAPHAEL  117 

Raphael  best.  He  saw  at  once  that  this  was  no 
ordinary  boy. 

'  He  is  my  pupil  now,  but  soon  he  will  be  my 
master,'  he  used  to  say  as  he  watched  the  boy  at 
work. 

So  he  taught  him  with  all  possible  carefulness, 
and  was  never  tired  of  giving  him  good  advice. 

'  Learn  first  of  all  to  draw,'  he  would  say,  when 
Raphael  looked  with  longing  eyes  at  the  colours  and 
brushes  of  the  master.  '  Draw  everything  you  see, 
no  matter  what  it  is,  but  always  draw  and  draw 
again.  The  rest  will  follow ;  but  if  the  knowledge 
of  drawing  be  lacking,  nothing  will  afterwards 
succeed.  Keep  always  at  hand  a  sketch-book,  and 
draw  therein  carefully  every  manner  of  thing  that 
meets  thy  eye.' 

Raphael  never  forgot  the  good  advice  of  his 
master.  He  was  never  without  a  sketch-book,  and 
his  drawings  now  are  almost  as  interesting  as  his 
great  pictures,  for  they  show  the  first  thought  that 
came  into  his  mind,  before  the  picture  was  com- 
posed. 

So  the  years  passed  on,  and  Raphael  learned  all 
that  the  master  could  teach  him.  At  first  his 
pictures  were  so  like  Perugino's,  that  it  was  difficult 
to  know  whether  they  were  the  work  of  the  master 
or  the  pupil. 

But  the  quiet  days  at  Perugia  soon  came  to  an 
end,  and  Perugino  went  back  to  Florence.  For 
some  time  Raphael  worked  at  different  places  near 
Perugia,  and  then  followed  his  master  to  the  City 
of  Flowers,  where  every  artist  longed  to  go.  Though 


118  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

he  was  still  but  a  young  man,  the  world  had  already 
begun  to  notice  his  work,  and  Florence  gladly  wel- 
comed a  new  artist. 

It  was  just  at  that  time  that  Leonardo  da  Vinci's 
fame  was  at  its  height,  and  when  Raphael  was 
shown  some  of  the  great  man's  work,  he  was  filled 
with  awe  and  wonder.  The  genius  of  Leonardo 
held  him  spellbound. 

*  It  is  what  I  have  dreamed  of  in  my  dreams,'  he 
said.  '  Oh  that  I  might  learn  his  secret ! ' 

Little  by  little  the  new  ideas  sunk  into  his  heart, 
and  the  pictures  he  began  to  paint  were  no  longer 
like  those  of  his  old  master  Perugino,  but  seemed  to 
breathe  some  new  spirit. 

It  was  always  so  with  Raphael,  He  seemed  to 
be  able  to  gather  the  best  from  every  one,  just  as  the 
bee  goes  from  flower  to  flower  and  gathers  its  sweet- 
ness into  one  golden  honeycomb.  Only  the  genius 
of  Raphael  made  all  that  he  touched  his  very  own, 
and  the  spirit  of  his  pictures  is  unlike  that  of  any 
other  master. 

For  many  years  after  this  he  lived  in  Rome, 
where  now  his  greatest  frescoes  may  be  seen — 
frescoes  so  varied  and  wonderful  that  many  books 
have  been  written  about  them. 

There  he  first  met  Margarita,  the  young  maiden 
whom  he  loved  all  his  life.  It  is  her  face  which 
looks  down  upon  us  from  the  picture  of  the  Sistine 
Madonna,  perhaps  the  most  famous  Madonna  that 
ever  was  painted.  The  little  room  in  the  Dresden 
Gallery  where  this  picture  now  hangs  seems  almost 
like  a  holy  place,  for  surely  there  is  something 


RAPHAEL  119 

divine  in  that  fair  face.  There  she  stands,  the 
Queen  of  Heaven,  holding  in  her  arms  the  Infant 
Christ,  with  such  a  strange  look  of  majesty  and  sad- 
ness in  her  eyes  as  makes  us  realise  that  she  was 
indeed  fit  to  be  the  Mother  of  our  Lord. 

But  the  picture  which  all  children  love  best  is  one 
in  Florence  called  'The  Madonna  of  the  Goldfinch.' 

It  is  a  picture  of  the  Holy  Family,  the  Infant 
Jesus,  His  mother,  and  the  little  St.  John.  The 
Christ  Child  is  a  dear  little  curly-headed  baby,  and 
He  stands  at  His  mother's  knee  with  one  little  bare 
foot  resting  on  hers.  His  hand  is  stretched  out 
protectingly  over  a  yellow  goldfinch  which  St.  John, 
a  sturdy  little  figure  clad  in  goatskins,  has  just 
brought  to  Him.  The  baby  face  is  full  of  tender 
love  and  care  for  the  little  fluttering  prisoner,  and 
His  curved  hand  is  held  over  its  head  to  protect  it. 

'  Do  not  hurt  My  bird,'  He  seems  to  say  to  the 
eager  St.  John,  'for  it  belongs  to  Me  and  to  My 
Father.' 

These  are  only  two  of  the  many  pictures  which 
Raphael  painted.  It  is  wonderful  to  think  how 
much  work  he  did  in  his  short  life,  for  he  died  when 
he  was  only  thirty-seven.  He  had  been  at  work  at 
St.  Peter's,  giving  directions  about  some  alterations, 
and  there  he  was  seized  by  a  severe  chill,  and  in  a 
few  days  the  news  spread  like  wildfire  through  the 
country  that  Raphael  was  dead. 

It  seemed  almost  as  if  it  could  not  be  true.  He 
had  been  so  full  of  life  and  health,  so  eager  for  work, 
such  a  living  power  among  men. 

But  there  he  lay,  beautiful  in  death  as  he  had 


120  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

been  in  life,  and  over  his  head  was  hung  the  picture 
of  the  '  Transfiguration,'  on  which  he  had  been  at 
work,  its  colours  yet  wet,  never  to  be  finished  by  that 
still  hand. 

All  Rome  flocked  to  his  funeral,  and  high  and 
low  mourned  his  loss.  But  he  left  behind  him  a 
fame  which  can  never  die,  a  name  which  through 
all  these  four  hundred  years  has  never  lost  the  magic 
of  its  greatness. 


MICHELANGELO 

SOMETIMES  in  a  crowd  of  people  one  sees  a  tall  man, 
who  stands  head  and  shoulders  higher  than  any  one 
else,  and  who  can  look  far  over  the  heads  of  ordinary- 
sized  mortals. 

'  What  a  giant ! '  we  exclaim,  as  we  gaze  up  and  see 
him  towering  above  us. 

So  among  the  crowd  of  painters  travelling  along 
the  road  to  Fame  we  see  above  the  rest  a  giant, 
a  greater  and  more  powerful  genius  than  any  that 
came  before  or  after  him.  When  we  hear  the  name 
of  Michelangelo  we  picture  to  ourselves  a  great 
rugged,  powerful  giant,  a  veritable  son  of  thunder, 
who,  like  the  Titans  of  old,  bent  every  force  of  Nature 
to  his  will. 

This  Michelangelo  was  born  at  Caprese  among  the 
mountains  of  Casentino.  His  father,  Lodovico  Buon- 
arroti, was  podesta  or  mayor  of  Caprese,  and  came 
of  a  very  ancient  and  honourable  family,  which  had 
often  distinguished  itself  in  the  service  of  Florence. 

Now  the  day  on  which  the  baby  was  born  happened 
to  be  not  only  a  Sunday,  but  also  a  morning  when 
the  stars  were  especially  favourable.  So  the  wise 
men  declared  that  some  heavenly  virtue  was  sure 
to  belong  to  a  child  born  at  that  particular  time,  and 
without  hesitation  Lodovico  determined  to  call  his 

121 


122  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

little  son  Michael  Angelo,  after  the  archangel  Michael. 
Surely  that  was  a  name  splendid  enough  to  adorn 
any  great  career. 

It  happened  just  then  that  Lodovico's  year  of 
office  ended,  and  so  he  returned  with  his  wife  and 
child  to  Florence.  He  had  a  property  at  Settignano, 
a  little  village  just  outside  the  city,  and  there  he 
settled  down. 

Most  of  the  people  of  the  village  were  stone- 
cutters, and  it  was  to  the  wife  of  one  of  these 
labourers  that  little  Michelangelo  was  sent  to  be 
nursed.  So  in  after  years  the  great  master  often 
said  that  if  his  mind  was  worth  anything,  he  owed 
it  to  the  clear  pure  mountain  air  in  which  he  was 
born,  just  as  he  owed  his  love  of  carving  stone  to 
the  unconscious  influence  of  his  nurse,  the  stone- 
cutter's wife. 

As  the  boy  grew  up  he  clearly  showed  in  what 
direction  his  interest  lay.  At  school  he  was  some- 
thing of  a  dunce  at  his  lessons,  but  let  him  but  have 
a  pencil  and  paper  and  his  mind  was  wide  awake 
at  once.  Every  spare  moment  he  spent  making 
sketches  on  the  walls  of  his  father's  house. 

But  Lodovico  would  not  hear  of  the  boy  becoming 
an  artist.  There  were  many  children  to  provide  for, 
and  the  family  was  not  rich.  It  would  be  much 
more  fitting  that  Michelangelo  should  go  into  the 
silk  and  woollen  business  and  learn  to  make  money. 

But  it  was  all  in  vain  to  try  to  make  the  boy  see 
the  wisdom  of  all  this.  Scold  as  they  might,  he 
cared  for  nothing  but  his  pencil,  and  even  after  he 
was  severely  beaten  he  would  creep  back  to  his 


MICHELANGELO  123 

beloved  work.  How  he  envied  his  friend  Francesco 
who  worked  in  the  shop  of  Master  Ghirlandaio  !  It 
was  a  joy  even  to  sit  and  listen  to  the  tales  of  the 
studio,  and  it  was  a  happy  day  when  Francesco 
brought  some  of  the  master's  drawings  to  show  to 
his  eager  friend. 

Little  by  little  Lodovico  began  to  see  that  there 
was  nothing  for  it  but  to  give  way  to  the  boy's  wishes, 
and  so  at  last,  when  he  was  fourteen  years  old,  Michel- 
angelo was  sent  to  study  as  a  pupil  in  the  studio 
of  Master  Ghirlandaio. 

It  was  just  at  the  time  when  Ghirlandaio  was  paint- 
ing the  frescoes  of  the  chapel  in  Santa  Maria  Novella, 
and  Michelangelo  learned  many  lessons  as  he  watched 
the  master  at  work,  or  even  helped  with  the  less 
important  parts. 

But  it  was  like  placing  an  eagle  in  a  hawk's  nest. 
The  young  eagle  quickly  learned  to  soar  far  higher 
than  the  hawk  could  do,  and  ere  long  began  to 
'  sweep  the  skies  alone.' 

It  was  not  pleasant  for  the  great  Florentine 
master,  whose  work  all  men  admired,  to  have  his 
drawings  corrected  by  a  young  lad,  and  perhaps 
Michelangelo  was  not  as  humble  as  he  should  have 
been.  In  the  strength  of  his  great  knowledge  he 
would  sometimes  say  sharp  and  scornful  things,  and 
perhaps  he  forgot  the  respect  due  from  pupil  to 
master. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  he  left  Ghirlandaio's  studio  when 
he  was  sixteen  years  old,  and  never  had  another 
master.  Thenceforward  he  worked  out  his  own  ideas 
in  his  giant  strength,  and  was  the  pupil  of  none. 


124  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

The  boy  Francesco  was  still  his  friend,  and  to- 
gether they  went  to  study  in  the  gardens  of  San 
Marco,  where  Lorenzo  the  Magnificent  had  collected 
many  statues  and  works  of  art.  Here  was  a  new 
field  for  Michelangelo.  Without  needing  a  lesson 
he  began  to  copy  the  statues  in  terra- cotta,  and  so 
clever  was  his  work  that  Lorenzo  was  delighted 
with  it. 

'  See,  now,  what  thou  canst  do  with  marble,'  he 
said.  'Terra-cotta  is  but  poor  stuff  to  work  in.' 

Michelangelo  had  never  handled  a  chisel  before, 
but  he  chipped  and  cut  away  the  marble  so  marvel- 
lously that  life  seemed  to  spring  out  of  the  stone. 
There  was  a  marble  head  of  an  old  faun  in  the 
garden,  and  this  Michelangelo  set  himself  to  copy. 
Such  a  wonderful  copy  did  he  make  that  Lorenzo 
was  amazed.  It  was  even  better  than  the  original, 
for  the  boy  had  introduced  ideas  of  his  own  and  had 
made  the  laughing  mouth  a  little  open  to  show  the 
teeth  and  the  tongue  of  the  faun.  Lorenzo  noticed 
this,  and  turned  with  a  smile  to  the  young  artist. 

'Thou  shouldst  have  remembered  that  old  folks 
never  keep  all  their  teeth,  but  that  some  of  them 
are  always  wanting,'  he  said. 

Of  course  Lorenzo  meant  this  as  a  joke,  but  Michel- 
angelo immediately  took  his  hammer  and  struck  out 
several  of  the  teeth,  and  this  too  pleased  Lorenzo 
greatly. 

There  was  nothing  that  the  Magnificent  ruler 
loved  so  much  as  genius,  so  Michelangelo  was  received 
into  the  palace  and  made  the  companion  of  Lorenzo's 
sons.  Not  only  did  good  fortune  thus  smile  upon  the 


MICHELANGELO  125 

young  artist,  but  to  his  great  astonishment  Lodovico 
too  found  that  benefits  were  showered  upon  him,  all 
for  the  sake  of  his  famous  young  son. 

These  years  of  peace,  and  calm,  steady  work  had  the 
greatest  effect  on  Michelangelo's  work,  and  he  learned 
much  from  the  clever,  brilliant  men  who  thronged 
Lorenzo's  court.  Then,  too,  he  first  listened  to  that 
ringing  voice  which  strove  to  raise  Florence  to  a 
sense  of  her  sins,  when  Savonarola  preached  his  great 
sermons  in  the  Duomo.  That  teaching  sank  deep 
into  the  heart  of  Michelangelo,  and  years  afterwards 
he  left  on  the  walls  of  the  Sistine  Chapel  a  living 
echo  of  those  thundering  words. 

Like  all  the  other  artists,  he  would  often  go  to 
study  Masaccio's  frescoes  in  the  little  chapel  of 
the  Carmine.  There  was  quite  a  band  of  young 
artists  working  there,  and  very  soon  they  began  to 
look  with  envious  feelings  at  Michelangelo's  drawings, 
and  their  jealousy  grew  as  his  fame  increased.  At 
last,  one  day,  a  youth  called  Torriggiano  could  bear 
it  no  longer,  and  began  to  make  scornful  remarks, 
and  worked  himself  up  into  such  a  rage  that  he 
aimed  a  blow  at  Michelangelo  with  his  fist,  which 
not  only  broke  his  nose  but  crushed  it  in  such  a  way 
that  he  was  marked  for  life.  He  had  had  a  rough, 
rugged  look  before  this,  but  now  the  crooked  nose 
gave  him  almost  a  savage  expression  which  he  never 
lost. 

Changes  followed  fast  after  this  time  of  quiet. 
Lorenzo  the  Magnificent  died,  and  his  son,  the  weak 
Piero  de  Medici,  tried  to  take  his  place  as  ruler  of 
Florence.  For  a  time  Michelangelo  continued  to  live 


126  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

at  the  court  of  Piero,  but  it  was  not  encouraging  to 
work  for  a  master  whose  foolish  taste  demanded 
statues  to  be  made  out  of  snow,  which,  of  course, 
melted  at  the  first  breath  of  spring. 

Michelangelo  never  forgot  all  that  he  owed  to 
Lorenzo,  and  he  loved  the  Medici  family,  but  his 
sense  of  justice  made  him  unable  to  take  their  part 
when  trouble  arose  between  them  and  the  Florentine 
people.  So  when  the  struggle  began  he  left  Florence 
and  went  first  to  Venice  and  then  to  Bologna.  From 
afar  he  heard  how  the  weak  Piero  had  been  driven 
out  of  the  city,  but  more  bitter  still  was  his  grief 
when  the  news  came  that  the  solemn  warning  voice 
of  the  great  preacher  Savonarola  was  silenced  for 
ever. 

Then  a  great  longing  to  see  his  beloved  city  again 
filled  his  heart,  and  he  returned  to  Florence. 

Botticelli  was  a  sad,  broken-down  old  man  now, 
and  Ghirlandaio  was  also  growing  old,  but  Florence 
was  still  rich  in  great  artists.  Leonardo  da  Vinci, 
Perugino,  and  Filippino  Lippi  were  all  there,  and 
men  talked  of  the  coming  of  an  even  greater  genius, 
the  young  Raphael  of  Urbino. 

There  happened  just  then  to  be  at  the  works  of  the 
Cathedral  of  St.  Mary  of  the  Flowers  a  huge  block 
of  marble  which  no  one  knew  how  to  use.  Leonardo 
da  Vinci  had  been  invited  to  carve  a  statue  out  of  it, 
but  he  had  refused  to  try,  saying  he  could  do  nothing 
with  it.  But  when  the  marble  was  offered  to  Michel- 
angelo his  eye  kindled  and  he  stood  for  a  long  time 
silent  before  the  great  white  block.  Through  the 
outer  walls  of  stone  he  seemed  to  see  the  figure  im- 


MICHELANGELO 

prisoned  in  the  marble,  and  his  giant  strength  and 
giant  mind  longed  to  go  to  work  to  set  that  figure 
free. 

And  when  the  last  covering  of  marble  was  chipped 
and  cut  away  there  stood  out  a  magnificent  figure  of 
the  young  David.  Perhaps  he  is  too  strong  and 
powerful  for  our  idea  of  the  gentle  shepherd-lad,  but 
he  is  a  wonderful  figure,  and  Goliath  might  well  have 
trembled  to  meet  such  a  young  giant. 

People  flocked  to  see  the  great  statue,  and  many 
were  the  discussions  as  to  where  it  should  be  placed. 
Artists  were  never  tired  of  giving  their  opinion,  and 
even  of  criticising  the  work.  « It  seems  to  me,'  said 
one,  '  that  the  nose  is  surely  much  too  large  for  the 
face.  Could  you  not  alter  that  ? ' 

Michelangelo  said  nothing,  but  he  mounted  the 
scaffolding  and  pretended  to  chip  away  at  the  nose 
with  his  chisel.  Meanwhile  he  let  drop  some  marble 
chips  and  dust  upon  the  head  of  the  critic  beneath. 
Then  he  came  down. 

'  Is  that  better  ? '  he  asked  gravely. 

*  Admirable  ! '  answered  the  artist.  '  You  have 
given  it  life.' 

Michelangelo  smiled  to  himself.  How  wise  people 
thought  themselves  when  they  often  knew  nothing 
about  what  they  were  talking !  But  the  critic  was 
satisfied,  and  did  not  notice  the  smile. 

It  would  fill  a  book  to  tell  of  all  the  work  which 
Michelangelo  did  ;  but  although  he  began  so  much,  a 
great  deal  of  it  was  left  unfinished.  If  he  had  lived 
in  quieter  times,  his  work  would  have  been  more 
complete ;  but  one  after  another  his  patrons  died,  or 


128  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

changed  their  minds,  and  set  him  to  work  at  some- 
thing else  before  he  had  finished  what  he  was 
doing. 

The  great  tomb  which  Pope  Julius  had  ordered 
him  to  make  was  never  finished,  although  Michel- 
angelo drew  out  all  the  designs  for  it,  and  for  forty 
years  was  constantly  trying  to  complete  it.  The 
Pope  began  to  think  it  was  an  evil  omen  to  build  his 
own  tomb,  so  he  made  up  his  mind  that  Michel- 
angelo should  instead  set  to  work  to  fresco  the  ceil- 
ing of  the  Sistine  Chapel.  In  vain  did  the  great 
sculptor  repeat  that  he  knew  but  little  of  the  art  of 
painting. 

*  Didst  thou  not  learn  to  mix  colours  in  the  studio 
of  Master  Ghirlandaio  ? '  said  Julius.  '  Thou  hast  but 
to  remember  the  lessons  he  taught  thee.  And,  be- 
sides, I  have  heard  of  a  great  drawing  of  a  battle- 
scene  which  thou  didst  make  for  the  Florentines, 
and  have  seen  many  drawings  of  thine,  one  especi- 
ally :  a  terrible  head  of  a  furious  old  man,  shrieking 
in  his  rage,  such  as  no  other  hand  than  thine  could 
have  drawn.  Is  there  aught  that  thou  canst  not  do 
if  thou  hast  but  the  will  ? ' 

And  the  Pope  was  right ;  for  as  soon  as  Michel- 
angelo really  made  up  his  mind  to  do  the  work,  all 
difficulties  seemed  to  vanish. 

It  was  no  easy  task  he  had  undertaken.  To  stand 
upright  and  cover  vast  walls  with  painting  is  diffi- 
cult enough,  but  Michelangelo  was  obliged  to  lie 
flat  upon  a  scaffolding  and  paint  the  ceiling  above 
him.  Even  to  look  up  at  that  ceiling  for  ten  minutes 
makes  the  head  and  neck  ache  with  pain,  and  we 


.  A 

ICllHANM 

,ONI\HOltB 

FAC1)  8W 

AT      " 


Urn  .ijQ 

"  A  terrible  head  01 


THE 
\  PUBL 


MICHELANGELO  129 

wonder  how  such  a  piece  of  work  could  ever  have 
been  done. 

No  help  would  the  master  accept,  and  he  had  no 
pupils.  Alone  he  worked,  and  he  could  not  bear  to 
have  any  one  near  him  looking  on.  In  silence  and 
solitude  he  lay  there  painting  those  marvellous 
frescoes  of  the  story  of  the  Creation  to  the  time  of 
Noah.  Only  Pope  Julius  himself  dared  to  disturb 
the  master,  and  he  alone  climbed  the  scaffolding  and 
watched  the  work. 

*  When  wilt  thou  have  finished  ? '  was  his  constant 
cry.     *  I  long  to  show  thy  work  to  the  world.' 

'  Patience,  patience,'  said  Michelangelo.  *  Nothing 
is  ready  yet.' 

'  But  when  wilt  thou  make  an  end  ? '  asked  the 
impatient  old  man. 

'  When  I  can,'  answered  the  painter. 

Then  the  Pope  lost  his  temper,  for  he  was  not 
accustomed  to  be  answered  like  this. 

*  Dost  thou  want  to  be  thrown  head  first  from  the 
scaffold  ? '  he  asked  angrily.     '  I  tell  thee  that  will 
happen  if  the  work  is  not  finished  at  once.' 

So,  incomplete  as  they  were,  Michelangelo  was 
obliged  to  uncover  the  frescoes  that  all  Rome  might 
see  them.  It  was  many  years  before  the  ceiling  was 
finished  or  the  final  fresco  of  the  Last  Judgment 
painted  upon  the  end  wall. 

Michelangelo  lived  to  be  a  very  old  man,  and  his 
life  was  lonely  and  solitary  to  the  end.  The  one 
woman  he  loved,  Vittoria  Colonna,  had  died,  and 
with  her  death  all  brightness  for  him  had  faded. 
Although  he  worked  so  much  in  Rome,  it  was  always 

I 


130  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Florence  that  he  loved.  There  it  was  that  he  began 
the  statues  for  the  Chapel  of  the  Medici,  and  there, 
too,  he  helped  to  build  the  defences  of  San  Miniato 
when  the  Medici  family  made  war  upon  the  City  of 
Flowers. 

So  when  the  great  man  died  in  Rome  it  seemed 
but  fit  that  his  body  should  be  carried  back  to  his 
beloved  Florence.  There  it  now  rests  in  the  Church 
of  Santa  Croce,  while  his  giant  works,  his  great  and 
terrible  thoughts  breathed  out  into  marble  or  flashed 
upon  the  walls  of  the  Sistine  Chapel,  live  on  for  ever, 
rilling  the  minds  of  men  with  a  great  awe  and  wonder 
as  they  gaze  upon  them. 


ANDREA  DEL  SARTO 

NOWHERE  in  Florence  could  a  more  honest  man  or 
a  better  worker  be  found  than  Agnolo  the  tailor. 
True,  there  were  once  evil  tales  whispered  about  him 
when  he  first  opened  his  shop  in  the  little  street.  It 
was  said  that  he  was  no  Italian,  but  a  foreigner  who 
had  been  obliged  to  flee  from  his  own  land  because 
of  a  quarrel  he  had  had  with  one  of  his  customers. 
People  shook  their  heads  and  talked  mysteriously 
of  how  the  tailor's  scissors  had  been  used  as  a  deadly 
weapon  in  the  fight.  But  ere  long  these  stories  died 
away,  and  the  tailor,  with  his  wife  Constanza,  lived 
a  happy,  busy  life,  and  brought  up  their  six  children 
carefully  and  well. 

Now  out  of  those  six  children  five  were  just  the 
ordinary  commonplace  little  ones  such  as  one  would 
expect  to  meet  in  a  tailor's  household,  but  the  sixth 
was  like  the  ugly  duckling  in  the  fairy  tale — a  little, 
strange  bird,  unlike  all  the  rest,  who  learned  to  swim 
far  away  and  soon  left  the  old  commonplace  home 
behind  him. 

The  boy's  name  was  Andrea.  He  was  such  a 
quick,  sharp  little  boy  that  he  was  sent  very  early 
to  school,  and  had  learned  to  read  and  write  before 
he  was  seven  years  old.  As  that  was  considered 
quite  enough  education,  his  father  then  took  him 


131 


132  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

away  from  school  and  put  him  to  work  with  a  gold- 
smith. 

It  is  early  days  to  begin  work  at  seven  years  old, 
but  Andrea  thought  it  was  quite  as  good  as  play. 
He  was  always  perfectly  happy  if  he  could  have  a 
pencil  and  paper,  and  his  drawings  and  designs  were 
really  so  wonderfully  good  that  his  master  grew  to 
be  quite  proud  of  the  child  and  showed  the  work  to 
all  his  customers. 

Next  door  to  the  goldsmith's  shop  there  lived  an 
old  artist  called  Barile,  who  began  to  take  a  great 
interest  in  little  Andrea.  Barile  was  not  a  great 
painter,  but  still  there  was  much  that  he  could 
teach  the  boy,  and  he  was  anxious  to  have  him  as  a 
pupil.  So  it  was  arranged  that  Andrea  should  enter 
the  studio  and  learn  to  be  an  artist  instead  of  a 
goldsmith. 

For  three  years  the  boy  worked  steadily  with  his 
new  master,  but  by  that  time  Barile  saw  that  better 
teaching  was  needed  than  he  could  give.  So  after 
much  thought  the  old  man  went  to  the  great  Floren- 
tine artist  Piero  di  Cosimo,  and  asked  him  if  he 
would  agree  to  receive  Andrea  as  his  pupil.  *  You 
will  find  the  boy  no  trouble,'  he  urged.  '  He  has 
wonderful  talent,  and  already  he  has  learnt  to  mix 
his  colours  so  marvellously  that  to  my  mind  there  is 
no  artist  in  Florence  who  knows  more  about  colour 
than  little  Andrea.'  Cosimo  shook  his  head  in 
unbelief.  The  boy  was  but  a  child,  and  this  praise 
seemed  absurd.  However,  the  drawings  were  cer- 
tainly extraordinary,  and  he  was  glad  to  receive  so 
clever  a  pupil. 


ANDREA  DEL  SARTO  133 

But  little  by  little,  as  Cosimo  watched  the  boy  at 
work,  his  unbelief  vanished  and  his  wonder  grew, 
until  he  was  as  fond  and  proud  of  his  pupil  as  the 
old  master  had  been.  '  He  handles  his  colours  as  if 
he  had  had  fifty  years  of  experience,'  he  would  say 
proudly,  as  he  showed  off  the  boy's  work  to  some 
new  patron. 

And  truly  the  knowledge  of  drawing  and  colour- 
ing seemed  to  come  to  the  boy  without  any  effort. 
Not  that  he  was  idle  or  trusted  to  chance.  He  was 
never  tired  of  work,  and  his  greatest  joy  on  holidays 
was  to  go  off  and  study  the  drawings  of  the  great 
Michelangelo  and  Leonardo  da  Vinci.  Often  he 
would  spend  the  whole  day  copying  these  drawings 
with  the  greatest  care,  never  tired  of  learning  more 
and  more. 

As  Andrea  grew  older,  all  Florence  began  to  take 
note  of  the  young  painter — '  Andrea  del  Sarto,'  as  he 
was  called,  or  '  the  tailor's  Andrew,'  for  sarto  is  the 
Italian  word  for  tailor. 

What  a  splendid  new  star  this  was  rising  in  the 
heaven  of  Art!  Who  could  tell  how  bright  it 
would  shine  ere  long?  Perhaps  the  tailor's  son 
would  yet  eclipse  the  magic  name  of  Raphael.  His 
colour  was  perfect,  his  drawing  absolutely  correct. 
They  called  him  in  their  admiration  'the  faultless 
painter.'  But  had  he,  indeed,  the  artist  soul  ?  That 
was  the  question.  For,  perfect  as  his  pictures  were, 
they  still  lacked  something.  Perhaps  time  would 
teach  him  to  supply  that  want. 

Meanwhile  there  was  plenty  of  work  for  the  young 
artist,  and  when  he  set  up  his  own  studio  with 


134  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

another  young  painter,  he  was  at  once  invited  to 
fresco  the  walls  of  the  cloister  of  the  Scalzo,  or  bare- 
footed friars. 

This  was  the  happiest  time  of  all  Andrea's  life. 
The  two  friends  worked  happily  together,  and  spent 
many  a  merry  day  with  their  companions.  Every 
day  Andrea  learned  to  add  more  softness  and  deli- 
cacy to  his  colouring  until  his  pictures  seemed  verily 
to  glow  with  life.  Every  day  he  dreamed  fresh 
dreams  of  the  fame  and  honour  that  awaited  him. 
And  when  work  was  over,  the  two  young  painters 
would  go  off  to  meet  their  friends  and  make  merry 
over  their  supper  as  they  told  all  the  latest  jokes 
and  wittiest  stories,  and  forgot  for  a  while  the  serious 
art  of  painting  pictures. 

There  were  twelve  of  these  young  men  who  met 
together,  and  each  of  them  was  bound  to  bring  some 
particular  dish  for  the  general  supper.  Every  one 
tried  to  think  of  something  especially  nice  and 
uncommon,  but  no  one  managed  such  surprising 
delicacies  as  Andrea.  There  was  one  special  dish 
which  no  one  ever  forgot.  It  was  in  the  shape  of 
a  temple,  with  its  pillars  made  of  sausages.  The 
pavement  was  formed  of  little  squares  of  different 
coloured  jelly,  the  tops  of  the  pillars  were  cheese, 
and  the  roof  was  of  sugar,  with  a  frieze  of  sweets 
running  round  it.  Inside  the  temple  there  was  a 
choir  of  roast  birds  with  their  mouths  wide  open, 
and  the  priests  were  two  fat  pigeons.  It  was  the 
most  splendid  supper-dish  that  ever  was  seen. 

Every  one  was  fond  of  the  clever  young  painter. 
He  was  so  kind  and  courteous  to  all,  and  so  simple- 


ANDREA  DEL  SARTO  135 

hearted  that  it  was  impossible  for  the  others  to  feel 
jealous  or  to  grudge  him  the  fame  and  praise  that 
was  showered  upon  him  more  and  more  as  each 
fresh  picture  was  finished. 

Then  just  when  all  gave  promise  of  sunshine  and 
happiness,  a  little  cloud  rose  in  his  blue  sky,  which 
grew  and  grew  until  it  dimmed  all  the  glory  of  his  life. 

In  the  Via  di  San  Gallo,  not  very  far  from  the  street 
where  Andrea  and  his  friend  lodged,  there  lived  a 
very  beautiful  woman  called  Lucrezia.  She  was 
not  a  highborn  lady,  only  the  daughter  of  a  working 
man,  but  she  was  as  proud  and  haughty  as  she  was 
beautiful.  Nought  cared  she  for  things  high  and 
noble,  she  was  only  greedy  of  praise  and  filled  with 
a  desire  to  have  her  own  way  in  everything.  Yet 
her  lovely  face  seemed  as  if  it  must  be  the  mirror 
of  a  lovely  soul,  and  when  the  young  painter 
Andrea  first  saw  her  his  heart  went  out  towards  her. 
She  was  his  long-dreamed-of  ideal  of  beauty  and 
grace,  the  vision  of  loveliness  which  he  had  been 
trying  to  grasp  all  his  life. 

*  What  hath  bewitched  thee  ? '  asked  his  friend  as 
he  watched  Andrea  restlessly  pacing  up  and  down 
the  studio,  his  brushes  thrown  aside  and  his  work 
left  unfinished.      'Thou  hast  done  little  work  for 
many  weeks.' 

'I  cannot  paint/  answered  Andrea,  'for  I  see 
only  one  face  ever  before  me,  and  it  comes  between 
me  and  my  work.' 

*  Thou  art  ruining  all  thy  chances,'  said  the  friend 
sadly,  '  and  the  face  thou   seest  is  not  worth  the 
sacrifice.' 


136  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Andrea  turned  on  his  heel  with  an  angry  look 
and  went  out.  All  his  friends  were  against  him 
now.  No  one  had  a  good  word  for  the  beautiful 
Lucrezia.  But  she  was  worth  all  the  world  to  him, 
and  he  had  made  up  his  mind  to  marry  her. 

It  was  winter  time,  and  the  Christmas  bells  had 
but  yesterday  rung  out  the  tidings  of  the  Holy 
Birthday  when  Andrea  at  last  obtained  his  heart's 
desire  and  made  Lucrezia  his  wife.  The  joyful 
Christmastide  seemed  a  fit  season  in  which  to  set 
the  seal  upon  his  great  happiness,  and  he  thought 
himself  the  most  fortunate  of  men.  He  had  asked 
advice  of  none,  and  had  told  no  one  what  he  meant 
to  do,  but  the  news  of  his  marriage  was  soon  noised 
abroad. 

*  Hast  thou  heard  the  news  of  voung  Andrea  del 

*  cu 

Sarto  ? '  asked  the  people  of  Florence  of  one  another. 
*  I  fear  he  has  dealt  an  evil  blow  at  his  own  chances 
of  success.' 

One  by  one  his  friends  left  him,  and  many  of  his 
pupils  deserted  the  studio.  Lucrezia's  sharp  tongue 
was  unbearable,  and  she  made  mischief  among  them 
all.  Only  Andrea  remained  blinded  by  her  beauty, 
and  thought  that  now,  with  such  a  model  always  near 
him,  he  would  paint  as  he  had  never  painted  before. 

But  little  did  Lucrezia  care  to  help  him  with  his 
work.  His  pictures  meant  nothing  to  her  except 
so  far  as  they  sold  well  and  brought  in  money  for 
her  to  spend.  Worst  of  all,  she  began  to  grudge 
the  help  that  he  gave  to  his  old  father  and  mother, 
who  now  were  poor  and  needed  his  care. 

And  yet,  although  Andrea  saw  all  this,  he  still 


ANDREA  DEL  SARTO  137 

loved  his  beautiful  wife  and  cared  only  how  he 
might  please  her.  He  scarcely  painted  a  picture 
that  had  not  her  face  in  it,  for  she  was  his  ideal 
Madonna,  Queen  of  Heaven. 

But  it  was  not  so  easy  now  to  put  his  whole  heart 
and  soul  into  his  work.  True,  his  hand  drew  as 
correctly  as  ever,  and  his  colours  were  even  more 
beautiful,  but  often  the  soul  seemed  lacking. 

'  Thou  dost  work  but  slowly,'  the  proud  beauty 
would  say,  tired  of  sitting  still  as  his  model.  *  Why 
canst  thou  not  paint  quicker  and  sell  at  higher 
prices  ?  I  have  need  of  more  gold,  and  the  money 
seems  to  grow  scarcer  week  by  week.' 

Andrea  sighed.  Truly  the  money  vanished  like 
magic,  as  Lucrezia's  jewels  and  dresses  increased. 

'Dear  heart,  have  a  little  patience,'  he  said.  'I 
can  but  do  my  best.' 

Then,  as  he  looked  at  the  angry  discontented  face 
of  his  wife,  he  laid  down  his  brushes  and  went  to 
kneel  beside  her. 

*  Lucrezia,'  he  said,  '  there  needs  something  be- 
sides mere  drawing  and  painting  to  make  a  picture. 
They  call  me  "  the  faultless  painter,"  and  it  seemed 
once  as  if  I  might  have  reached  as  high  or  even 
higher  than  the  great  Raphael.     It  needed  but  the 
soul  put  into  my  work,  and  if  thou  couldst  have 
helped  me  to  reach  my  ideal,  what  would  I  not 
have  shown  the  world  1 ' 

*  I  do  not  understand  thee,'  said  Lucrezia  petu- 
lantly, '  and  this  is  waste  of  time.     Haste  thee  and 
get  back  to  thy  brushes  and  paints,  and  see  that 
thou  drivest  a  better  bargain  with  this  last  picture.' 


138  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

No,  it  was  no  use ;  she  could  never  understand ! 
Andrea  knew  that  he  must  look  for  no  help  from 
her,  and  that  he  must  paint  in  spite  of  the  hindrances 
she  placed  in  his  way.  Well,  his  work  was  still 
considered  most  beautiful,  and  he  must  make  the 
best  of  it. 

Orders  for  pictures  came  now  from  far  and  near, 
and  before  long  some  of  Andrea's  work  found  its 
way  into  France  ;  and  when  King  Francis  saw  it  he 
was  so  anxious  to  have  the  painter  at  his  court,  that 
he  sent  a  royal  invitation,  begging  Andrea  to  come 
at  once  to  France  and  enter  the  king's  service. 

The  invitation  came  when  Andrea  was  feeling 
hopeless  and  dispirited.  Lucrezia  gave  him  no 
peace,  the  money  was  all  spent,  and  he  was  weary 
of  work.  The  thought  of  starting  afresh  in  another 
country  put  new  courage  into  him.  He  made  up 
his  mind  to  go  at  once  to  the  French  court.  He 
would  leave  Lucrezia  in  some  safe  place  and  send 
her  all  the  money  he  could  earn. 

How  good  it  was  to  leave  all  his  troubles  behind, 
and  to  set  off  that  glad  May  day  when  all  the  world 
breathed  of  new  life  and  new  hope.  Perhaps  the 
winter  of  his  life  was  passed  too,  and  only  sunshine 
and  summer  was  in  store. 

Andrea's  welcome  at  the  French  court  was  most 
flattering.  Nothing  was  thought  too  good  for  the 
famous  Florentine  painter,  and  he  was  treated  like 
a  prince.  The  king  loaded  him  with  gifts,  and  gave 
him  costly  clothes  and  money  for  all  his  needs.  A 
portrait  of  the  infant  Dauphin  was  begun  at  once,  for 
which  Andrea  received  three  hundred  golden  pieces. 


ANDREA  DEL  SARTO  139 

Month  after  month  passed  happily  by.  Andrea 
painted  many  pictures,  and  each  one  was  more 
admired  than  the  last.  But  his  dream  of  happiness 
did  not  last  long.  He  was  hard  at  work  one  day 
when  a  letter  was  brought  to  him,  sent  by  his  wife 
Lucrezia.  She  could  not  live  without  him,  so  she 
wrote.  He  must  come  home  at  once.  If  he  delayed 
much  longer  he  would  not  find  her  alive. 

There  could  be,  of  course,  but  one  answer  to  all 
this.  Andrea  loved  his  wife  too  well  to  think  of 
refusing  her  request,  and  the  days  of  peace  and 
plenty  must  come  to  an  end.  Even  as  he  read  her 
letter  he  began  to  long  to  see  her  again,  and  the 
thought  of  showing  her  all  his  gay  clothes  and 
costly  presents  filled  him  with  delight. 

But  the  king  was  very  loth  to  let  the  painter 
go,  and  only  at  last  consented  when  Andrea 
promised  most  faithfully  to  return  a  few  months 
hence. 

*  I  cannot  spare  thee  for  longer/  said  Francis ; 
*  but  I  will  let  thee  go  on  condition  that  thou  wilt 
buy  for  me  certain  works  of  art  in  Italy,  which  I 
have  long  coveted,  and  bring  them  back  with  thee.' 

Then  he  entrusted  to  Andrea  a  large  sum  of 
money  and  bade  him  buy  the  best  pictures  he  could 
find,  and  afterwards  return  without  fail. 

So  Andrea  journeyed  back  to  Florence,  and  when 
he  was  once  again  with  his  wife,  his  joy  and  delight 
in  her  were  so  great  that  he  forgot  all  his  promises, 
forgot  even  the  king's  trust,  and  allowed  Lucrezia 
to  squander  all  the  money  which  was  to  have  been 
spent  on  art  treasures  for  King  Francis. 


140  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Then  returned  the  evil  days  of  trouble  and 
quarrelling.  Added  to  that  the  terrible  feeling  that 
he  had  betrayed  his  trust  and  broken  his  word,  made 
Andrea  more  unhappy  than  ever.  He  dared  not 
return  to  France,  but  took  up  again  his  work  in 
Florence,  always  with  the  hope  that  he  might  make 
enough  money  to  repay  the  debt. 

Years  went  by  and  dark  days  fell  upon  the  City 
of  Flowers.  She  had  made  a  great  struggle  for 
liberty  and  had  driven  out  the  Medici,  but  they  were 
helped  by  enemies  from  without,  and  Florence  was  for 
many  months  in  a  state  of  siege.  There  was  constant 
fighting  going  on  and  little  time  for  peaceful  work. 

Yet  through  all  those  troubled  days  Andrea 
worked  steadily  at  his  painting,  and  paid  but  little 
heed  to  the  fate  of  the  city.  The  stir  of  battle  did 
not  reach  his  quiet  studio.  There  was  enough  strife 
at  home  ;  no  need  to  seek  it  outside. 

It  was  about  this  time  that  he  painted  a  beautiful 
picture  for  the  Company  of  San  Jacopo,  which  was 
used  as  a  banner  and  carried  in  their  processions. 
Bad  weather,  wind,  rain,  and  sunshine  have  spoiled 
some  of  its  beauty,  but  much  of  the  loveliness  still 
remains.  It  is  specially  a  children's  picture,  for 
Andrea  painted  the  great  saint  bending  over  a  little 
child  in  a  white  robe  who  kneels  at  his  feet,  while 
another  little  figure  kneels  close  by.  The  boy  has 
his  hands  folded  together  as  if  in  prayer,  and  the 
kind  strong  hand  of  the  saint  is  placed  lovingly 
beneath  the  little  chin.  The  other  child  is  holding 
a  book,  and  both  children  press  close  against  the 
robe  of  the  protecting  saint. 


S.  JAMES.   By  ANDREA  DEL  SARTO 

"  The  kind  strong  hand  of  the  saint  is  placed  lovingly  beneath 
the  little  chin  " 


TTV 


1  c 


ANDREA  DEL  SARTO  141 

But  although  Andrea  could  paint  his  pictures 
undisturbed  while  war  was  raging  around,  there  was 
one  enemy  waiting  to  enter  Florence  who  claimed 
attention  and  could  not  be  ignored.  When  the 
triumphant  troops  gained  an  entrance  by  treachery, 
they  brought  with  them  that  deadly  scourge  which 
was  worse  than  any  earthly  enemy,  the  dreadful 
illness  called  the  plague. 

Perhaps  Andrea  had  suffered  for  want  of  good 
food  during  the  siege,  perhaps  he  was  overworked 
and  tired ;  but,  whatever  was  the  cause,  he  was  one 
of  the  first  to  be  seized  by  that  terrible  disease. 
Alone  he  fought  the  enemy,  and  alone  he  died. 
Lucrezia  had  left  him  as  soon  as  he  fell  ill,  for  she 
feared  the  deadly  plague,  and  Andrea  gladly  let  her 
go,  for  he  loved  her  to  the  last  with  the  same  great 
unselfish  love. 

So  passed  away  the  faultless  painter,  and  his  was 
the  last  great  name  engraved  upon  that  golden 
record  of  Florentine  Art  which  had  made  Florence 
famous  in  the  eyes  of  the  world.  Other  artists  came 
after  him,  but  Art  was  on  the  wane  in  the  City  of 
Flowers,  and  her  glory  was  slowly  departing. 

We  can  trace  no  other  great  name  upon  her  pages 
and  so  we  close  the  book,  and  our  eyes  turn  towards 
the  shores  of  the  blue  Adriatic,  where  Venice, 
Queen  of  the  Sea,  was  writing,  year  by  year, 
another  volume  filled  with  the  names  of  her  own 
Knights  of  Art. 


THE   BELLINI 

ALMOST  all  the  stories  of  the  lives  of  the  painters 
which  we  have  been  listening  to,  until  now,  have 
clustered  round  Florence,  the  City  of  Flowers. 
She  was  their  great  mother,  and  her  sons  loved  her 
with  a  deep,  passionate  love,  thinking  nothing  too 
fair  with  which  to  deck  her  beauty.  Wherever 
they  wandered  she  drew  them  back,  for  their  very 
heartstrings  were  wound  around  her,  and  each  and 
all  strove  to  give  her  of  their  best. 

But  now  we  come  to  the  stories  of  men  whose 
lives  gather  round  a  different  centre.  Instead  of 
the  great  mother-city  beside  the  Arno,  with  her 
strong  towers  and  warlike  citizens,  the  noise  of 
battle  ever  sounding  in  her  streets,  and  her  flowery 
fields  encircling  her  on  every  side,  we  have  now 
Venice,  Queen  of  the  Sea. 

No  warlike  tread  or  tramp  of  angry  crowds 
disturbs  her  fair  streets,  for  here  are  no  pavements, 
only  the  cool  green  water  which  laps  the  walls  of 
her  marble  palaces,  and  gives  back  the  sound  of  the 
dipping  oar  and  the  soft  echo  of  passing  voices,  as 
the  gondolas  glide  along  her  watery  ways.  Here 
are  no  grim  grey  towers  of  defence,  but  fairy  palaces 
of  white  and  coloured  marbles,  which  rise  from  the 
waters  below  as  if  they  had  been  built  by  the  sea- 

142 


THE  BELLINI  143 

nymphs,  who  had  fashioned  them  of  their  own  sea- 
shells  and  mother-of-pearl. 

There  are  no  flowery  meadows  here,  but  instead 
the  vast  waters  of  the  lagoons,  which  reach  out  until 
they  meet  the  blue  arc  of  the  sky  or  touch  the 
distant  mountains  which  lie  like  a  purple  line  upon 
the  horizon.  Here  and  there  tiny  islands  lie  upon 
its  bosom,  so  faint  and  fairylike  that  they  scarcely 
seem  like  solid  land,  reflected  as  they  are  in  the 
transparent  water. 

But  although  Venice  has  no  meadows  decked 
with  flowers  and  no  wealth  of  blossoming  trees, 
everywhere  on  every  side  she  shines  with  colour, 
this  wonderful  sea-girt  city.  Her  white  marble 
palaces  glow  with  a  soft  amber  light,  the  cool  green 
water  that  reflects  her  beauty  glitters  in  rings  of 
gold  and  blue,  changing  from  colour  to  colour  as 
each  ripple  changes  its  form.  At  sunset,  when  the 
sun  disappears  over  the  edge  of  the  lagoon  and 
leaves  behind  its  trail  of  shining  clouds,  she  is  like 
a  dream-city  rising  from  a  sea  of  molten  gold — a 
double  city,  for  in  the  pure  gold  is  reflected  each 
tower  and  spire,  each  palace  and  campanile,  in 
masses  of  pale  yellow  and  quivering  white  light, 
with  here  and  there  a  burning  touch  of  flame  colour. 
She  seems  to  have  no  connection  with  the  solid, 
ordinary  cities  of  the  world.  There  she  lies  in  all 
her  beauty,  silent  and  apart,  like  a  white  sea-bird 
floating  upon  the  bosom  of  the  ocean. 

Venice  had  always  seemed  separate  and  distinct 
from  the  rest  of  the  world.  Her  cathedral  of  San 
Marco  was  never  under  the  rule  of  Rome,  and  her 


144  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

rulers,  or  doges,  as  they  were  called,  governed  the 
city  as  kings,  and  did  not  trouble  themselves  with 
the  affairs  of  other  towns.  Her  merchant  princes 
sailed  to  far  countries  and  brought  home  precious 
spoils  to  add  to  her  beauty.  Everything  was  as 
rich  and  rare  and  splendid  as  it  was  possible  to 
make  it,  and  she  was  unlike  any  other  city  on  earth. 

So  the  painters  who  lived  and  worked  in  this  city 
of  the  sea  had  their  own  special  way  of  painting, 
which  was  different  to  that  of  the  Florentine  school. 

From  their  babyhood  these  men  had  looked  upon 
all  this  beauty  of  colour,  and  the  love  of  it  had 
grown  with  their  growth.  The  golden  light  on  the 
water,  the  pearly-grey  and  tinted  marbles,  the  gay 
sails  of  the  galleys  which  swept  the  lagoons  like 
painted  butterflies,  the  wide  stretch  of  water  ending 
in  the  mystery  of  the  distant  skyline — it  all  sank  into 
their  hearts,  and  it  was  little  wonder  that  they 
should  strive  to  paint  colour  above  all  things,  and 
at  last  reach  a  perfection  such  as  no  other  school  of 
painters  has  equalled. 

As  with  the  Florentine  artists,  so  with  these 
Venetian  painters,  we  must  leave  many  names  un- 
noticed just  now,  and  learn  first  to  know  those 
which  shine  out  clearest  among  the  many  bright 
stars  of  fame. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  fifteenth  century,  four 
hundred  years  ago,  when  Fra  Filippo  Lippi  was 
painting  in  Florence,  there  lived  in  Venice  a  certain 
Jacopo  Bellini,  who  was  a  painter,  and  who  had 
two  sons  called  Gentile  and  Giovanni.  The  father 
taught  his  boys  with  great  care,  and  gave  them  the 


THE  BELLINI  145 

best  training  he  could,  for  he  was  anxious  that  his 
sons  should  become  great  painters.  He  saw  that 
they  were  both  clever  and  quick  to  learn,  and  he 
hoped  great  things  of  them. 

*  Never  do  less  than  your  very  best,'  he  would  say, 
as  he  taught  the  boys  how  to  draw  and  use  their 
colours.  '  See  how  the  Tuscan  artists  strive  with 
one  another,  each  desiring  to  do  most  honour  to 
their  city  of  Florence.  So,  Gentile,  I  would  have 
thee  also  strive  to  be  great;  and  thou,  Giovanni, 
endeavour  to  be  even  greater  than  thy  brother/ 

But  though  the  boys  were  thus  taught  to  try  and 
outdo  each  other,  still  they  were  always  the  best  of 
friends,  and  there  was  never  any  unkind  rivalry 
between  them. 

Gentile,  the  eldest,  was  fond  of  painting  story 
pictures,  which  told  the  history  of  Venice,  and 
showed  the  magnificent  doges,  and  nobles,  and 
people  of  the  city,  dressed  in  their  rich  robes.  The 
Venetians  loved  pictures  which  showed  forth  the 
glory  of  their  city,  and  very  soon  Gentile  was 
invited  to  paint  the  walls  of  the  Ducal  Palace  with 
his  historical  pictures. 

Now  Venice  earned  on  a  great  trade  with  her 
ships,  which  sailed  to  many  foreign  lands.  These 
ships,  loaded  with  merchandise,  touched  at  different 
ports,  and  the  merchants  sold  their  goods  or  took 
in  exchange  other  things  which  they  brought  back 
to  Venice.  It  happened  that  one  of  the  ships  which 
set  sail  for  Turkey  had  on  board  among  other  things 
several  pictures  painted  by  Giovanni  Bellini.  These 
were  shown  to  the  Sultan  of  Turkey,  who  had  never 

K 


146  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

seen  a  picture  before,  and  he  was  amazed  and  de- 
lighted beyond  words.  His  religion  forbade  the 
making  of  pictures,  but  he  paid  no  attention  now  to 
that  law,  but  sent  a  messenger  to  Venice  praying 
that  the  painter  Bellini  might  come  to  him  at  once. 

The  rulers  of  Venice  were  unwilling  to  spare 
Giovanni  just  then,  but  they  allowed  Gentile  to  go, 
as  his  work  at  the  Ducal  Palace  was  finished. 

So  Gentile  took  his  canvases  and  paints,  and, 
setting  sail  in  one  of  the  merchant  ships,  soon 
arrived  at  the  court  of  the  Grand  Turk. 

He  was  received  with  every  honour,  and  nothing 
was  thought  too  good  for  this  wonderful  painter, 
who  could  make  pictures  which  looked  like  living 
men.  The  Sultan  loaded  him  with  gifts  and  favours, 
and  he  lived  there  like  a  royal  prince.  Each  picture 
painted  by  Gentile  was  thought  more  wonderful 
than  the  last.  He  painted  a  portrait  of  the  Sultan, 
and  even  one  of  himself,  which  was  considered  little 
short  of  magic. 

Thus  a  whole  year  passed  by,  and  Gentile  had  a 
most  delightful  time  and  was  well  contented,  until  one 
day  something  happened  which  disturbed  his  peace. 

He  had  painted  a  picture  of  the  dancing  daughter 
of  Herodias,  with  the  head  of  John  the  Baptist  in 
her  hand,  and  when  it  was  finished  he  brought  it 
and  presented  it  to  the  Sultan. 

As  usual,  the  Sultan  was  charmed  with  the  new 
picture ;  but  he  paused  in  his  praises  of  its  beauty, 
and  looked  thoughtfully  at  the  head  of  St.  John,  and 
then  frowned. 

'  It  seems  to  me,'  he  said,  *  that  there  is  something 


THE  BELLINI  147 

not  quite  right  about  that  head.  I  do  not  think  a 
head  which  had  just  been  cut  off  would  look  exactly 
as  that  does  in  your  picture.' 

Gentile  answered  courteously  that  he  did  not  wish 
to  contradict  his  royal  highness,  but  it  seemed  to 
him  that  the  head  was  right. 

'  We  shall  see,'  said  the  Sultan  calmly,  and  he 
turned  carelessly  to  a  guard  who  stood  close  by  and 
bade  him  cut  off  the  head  of  one  of  the  slaves,  that 
Bellini  might  see  if  his  picture  was  really  correctly 
painted. 

This  was  more  than  Gentile  could  stand. 

*  Who  knows,'  he  said  to  himself,  *  that  the  Sultan 
may  not  wish  to  see  next  how  my  head  would  look 
cut  off  from  my  body  ! ' 

So  while  his  precious  head  was  still  safe  upon  his 
shoulders  he  thought  it  wiser  to  slip  quietly  away  and 
return  to  Venice  by  the  very  first  ship  he  could  find. 

Meanwhile  Giovanni  had  worked  steadily  on,  and 
had  far  surpassed  both  his  father  and  his  brother. 
Indeed,  he  had  become  the  greatest  painter  in 
Venice,  the  first  of  that  wonderful  Venetian  school 
which  learned  to  paint  such  marvellous  colour. 

With  all  the  wealth  of  delicate  shading  spread 
out  before  his  eyes,  with  the  ever-changing  wonder 
of  the  opal-tinted  sea  meeting  him  on  every  side,  it 
was  not  strange  that  the  love  of  colour  sank  into  his 
very  heart.  In  his  pictures  we  can  see  the  golden 
glow  which  bathes  the  marble  palaces,  the  clear 
green  of  the  water,  the  pure  blues  and  burning 
crimsons  all  as  transparent  as  crystal,  not  mere 
paint  but  living  colour. 


148  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

Giovanni  did  not  care  to  paint  stories  of  Venice, 
with  great  crowds  of  figures,  as  Gentile  did.  He 
loved  best  the  Madonna  and  saints,  single  figures 
full  of  quiet  dignity.  His  saints  are  more  human 
than  those  which  Fra  Angelico  painted,  and  yet 
they  are  not  mere  men  and  women,  but  something 
higher  and  nobler.  Instead  of  the  angels  swinging 
their  censers  which  the  painter  of  San  Marco  so 
lovingly  drew,  Giovanni's  angels  are  little  human 
boys,  with  grave  sweet  faces ;  happy  children  with  a 
look  of  heaven  in  their  eyes,  as  they  play  on  their 
little  lutes  and  mandolines. 

But  besides  the  pictures  of  saints  and  angels, 
Giovanni  had  a  wonderful  gift  for  painting  portraits,, 
and  most  of  the  great  people  of  Venice  came  to  be 
painted  by  him.  In  our  own  National  Gallery  we 
have  the  portrait  oi  the  Doge  Loredan,  which  is  one 
of  those  pictures  which  can  teach  you  many  things 
when  you  have  learned  to  look  with  seeing  eyes. 

So  the  brothers  worked  together,  but  before  long 
death  carried  off  the  elder,  and  Giovanni  was  left  alone. 

Though  he  was  now  very  old,  Giovanni  worked 
harder  than  ever,  and  his  hand,  instead  of  losing 
power,  seemed  to  grow  stronger  and  more  and  more 
skilful.  He  was  ninety  years  old  when  he  died,  and 
he  worked  almost  up  to  the  last. 

The  brothers  were  both  buried  in  the  church  of 
SS.  Giovanni  e  Paolo,  in  the  heart  of  Venice.  There,, 
in  the  dim  quietness  of  the  old  church,  they  lie  at 
rest  together,  undisturbed  by  the  voices  of  the 
passers-by  in  the  square  outside,  or  the  lapping  of 
the  water  against  the  steps,  as  the  tides  ebb  and 
flow  around  their  quiet  resting-place. 


CHERUB.     By   GIOV.    BELLINI 
1  Giovanni's  angels  are  little  human  boys  with  grave  sweet  faces 


TJL 


VITTORE   CARPACCIO 

LIKE  most  of  the  other  great  painters,  Giovanni 
Bellini  had  many  pupils  working  under  him — boys 
who  helped  their  master,  and  learned  their  lessons 
by  watching  him  work.  Among  these  pupils  was  a 
boy  called  Vittore  Carpaccio,  a  sharp,  clever  lad, 
with  keen  bright  eyes  which  noticed  everything. 
No  one  else  learned  so  quickly  or  copied  the  master's 
work  so  faithfully,  and  when  in  time  he  became  him- 
self a  famous  painter,  his  work  showed  to  the  end 
traces  of  the  master's  influence. 

He  must  have  been  a  curious  boy,  this  Vittore 
Carpaccio,  for  although  we  know  but  little  of  his 
life,  his  pictures  tell  us  many  a  tale  about  him. 

In  the  olden  days,  when  Venice  was  at  the  height 
of  her  glory,  splendid  fetes  were  given  in  the  city, 
and  the  gorgeous  shows  were  a  wonder  to  behold. 
Early  in  the  morning  of  these  festa  days,  Carpaccio 
would  steal  away  in  the  dim  light  from  the  studio, 
before  the  others  were  astir.  Work  was  left  behind, 
for  who  could  work  indoors  on  days  like  these  ? 
There  was  a  holiday  feeling  in  the  very  air.  Songs 
and  laughter  and  the  echo  of  merry  voices  were 
heard  on  every  side,  and  the  city  seemed  one  vast 
playground,  where  all  the  grown-up  children  as  well 
as  the  babies  were  ready  to  spend  a  happy  holiday. 


149 


150  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

The  little  side-streets  of  Venice,  cut  up  by  canals, 
seem  like  a  veritable  maze  to  those  who  do  not  know 
the  city,  but  Carpaccio  could  quickly  thread  his  way 
from  bridge  to  bridge,  and  by  many  a  short  cut 
arrive  at  last  at  the  great  central  water  street  of 
Venice,  the  Grand  Canal.  Here  it  was  easy  to  find 
a  corner  from  which  he  could  see  the  gay  pageant, 
and  enjoy  as  good  a  view  as  any  of  those  great 
people  who  would  presently  come  out  upon  the 
balconies  of  their  marble  palaces. 

The  bridge  of  the  Rialto,  which  throws  its  white 
span  across  the  centre  of  the  canal,  was  Carpaccio's 
favourite  perch,  for  from  here  he  could  see  the 
markets  and  the  long  row  of  marble  palaces  on 
either  side.  From  every  window  hung  gay-coloured 
tapestry,  Turkey  carpets,  silken  draperies,  and 
delicate-tinted  stuffs  covered  with  Eastern  embroid- 
eries. The  market  was  crowded  with  a  throng  of 
holiday-makers,  a  garden  of  bright  colours,  and  from 
the  balconies  above  richly  dressed  ladies  looked 
down,  themselves  a  pageant  of  beauty,  with  their 
wonderful  golden  hair  and  gleaming  jewels,  while 
green  and  crimson  parrots,  fastened  by  golden 
chains  to  the  marble  balustrades,  screamed  and 
flapped  their  wings,  and  delighted  Carpaccio's  keen 
eyes  with  their  vivid  beauty. 

Then  the  procession  of  boats  swept  up  the  great 
waterway,  and  the  blaze  of  colour  made  the  boy 
hold  his  breath  in  sheer  delight.  The  painted 
galleys,  the  rowers  in  their  quaint  dresses — half  one 
colour  and  half  another — with  jaunty  feathered  caps 
upon  their  floating  curls,  the  nobles  and  rulers  in 


VITTORE  CARPACCIO  151 

their  crimson  robes,  the  silken  curtains  of  every  hue 
trailing  their  golden  fringes  in  the  cool  green  water, 
as  the  boats  glided  past,  all  made  up  a  picture  which 
the  boy  never  forgot. 

Then  when  it  was  all  over,  Carpaccio  would  climb 
down  and  make  his  way  back  to  the  master's  studio, 
and  with  the  gay  scene  ever  before  his  eyes  would 
try,  day  after  day,  to  paint  every  detail  just  as  he 
had  seen  it. 

There  is  another  thing  which  we  learn  about 
Carpaccio  from  his  pictures,  and  that  is,  that  he 
must  have  loved  to  listen  to  old  legends  and  stories 
of  the  saints,  and  that  he  stored  them  up  in  his 
mind,  just  as  he  treasured  the  remembrance  of  the 
gay  processions  and  the  flapping  wings  of  those 
crimson  and  green  parrots. 

So,  when  he  grew  to  be  a  man,  and  his  fame 
began  to  spread,  the  first  great  pictures  he  painted 
were  of  the  story  of  St.  Ursula,  told  in  loving  detail, 
as  only  one  who  loved  the  story  could  do  it. 

But  though  Carpaccio  might  paint  pictures  of 
these  old  stories,  it  was  always  through  the  golden 
haze  of  Venice  that  he  saw  them.  His  St.  Ursula  is 
a  dainty  Venetian  lady,  and  the  bedroom  in  which 
she  dreams  her  wonderful  dream  is  just  a  room  in 
one  of  the  old  marble  palaces,  with  a  pot  of  pinks 
upon  the  window-sill,  and  her  little  high-heeled 
Venetian  shoes  by  the  bedside.  Whenever  it  was 
possible,  Carpaccio  would  paint  in  those  scenes  on 
which  his  eyes  had  rested  since  his  childhood — the 
painted  galleys  with  their  sails  reflected  in  the  clear 
water,  the  dainty  dresses  of  the  Venetian  ladies. 


152  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

their  gay-coloured  parrots,  pet  dogs,  and  grinning 
monkeys. 

In  an  old  church  of  Venice  there  are  some  pic- 
tures said  to  have  been  painted  by  Carpaccio  when 
he  was  a  little  boy  only  eight  years  old.  They  are 
scenes  taken  from  the  Bible  stories,  and  very  funny 
scenes  they  are  too.  But  they  show  already  what 
clever  little  hands  and  what  a  thinking  head  the  boy 
had,  and  how  Venice  was  the  background  in  his 
mind  for  every  story.  For  here  is  the  meeting  of 
the  Queen  of  Sheba  and  King  Solomon,  and  instead 
of  Jerusalem  with  all  its  glory,  we  see  a  little 
wooden  bridge,  with  King  Solomon  on  one  side  and 
the  Queen  of  Sheba  on  the  other,  walking  towards 
each  other,  as  if  they  were  both  in  Venice  crossing 
one  of  the  little  canals. 

There  were  many  foreign  sailors  in  Venice  in 
those  old  days,  who  came  in  the  trading-ships  from 
distant  lands.  Many  of  them  were  poor  and  unable 
to  earn  money  to  buy  food,  and  when  they  were  ill 
there  was  no  one  to  look  after  them  or  help  them. 
So  some  of  the  richer  foreigners  founded  a  Brother- 
hood, where  the  poor  sailors  might  be  helped  in  time 
of  need.  This  Brotherhood  chose  St.  George  as 
their  patron  saint,  and  when  they  had  built  a  little 
chapel  they  invited  Carpaccio  to  come  and  paint  the 
walls  with  pictures  from  the  life  of  St.  George  and 
other  saints. 

Nothing  could  have  suited  Carpaccio  better,  and 
he  began  his  work  with  great  delight,  for  he  had 
still  his  child's  love  of  stories,  and  he  would  make 
them  as  gay  and  wonderful  as  possible.  There  we 


O       -0 


8 

0< 

ce 
< 
D 


M 
m 

M 

J 

i-» 

w 


H 

a 

H 


m 


O 
O 

•o 
a 
a 


•o 
c 


O 

K 


oj 

fl 


9 

a 


ri 


VITTORE  CARPACCIO  153 

see  St.  George  thundering  along  on  his  war-horse, 
with  flying  hair,  clad  in  beautiful  armour,  the  most 
perfect  picture  of  a  chivalrous  knight.  Then  comes 
the  dragon  breathing  out  flames  and  smoke,  the 
most  awesome  dragon  that  ever  was  seen  ;  and  there 
too  is  the  picture  of  St.  Tryphonius  taming  the 
terrible  basilisk.  The  little  boy-saint  has  folded 
his  hands  together,  and  looks  upward  in  prayer, 
paying  little  heed  to  the  evil  glare  of  the  basilisk, 
who  prances  at  his  feet  A  crowd  of  gaily  dressed 
courtiers  stand  whispering  and  watching  behind  the 
marble  steps,  and  here  again  in  the  background  we 
have  the  canals  and  bridges  of  Venice,  the  marble 
palaces  and  gay  carpets  hung  from  out  the  windows. 
Everything  is  of  the  very  best  of  its  kind,  and 
painted  with  the  greatest  care,  even  to  the  design 
of  the  inlaid  work  on  the  marble  steps. 

As  we  pass  from  picture  to  picture,  we  wish  we 
had  known  this  Carpaccio,  for  he  must  have  been  a 
splendid  teller  of  stories ;  and  how  he  would  have 
made  us  shiver  with  his  dragons  and  his  basilisks, 
and  laugh  over  the  antics  of  his  little  boys  and  girls, 
his  scarlet  parrots  and  green  lizards. 

But  although  we  cannot  hear  him  tell  his  stories, 
he  still  speaks  through  those  wonderful  old  pictures 
which  you  will  some  day  see  when  you  visit  the 
fairyland  of  Italy,  and  pay  your  court  to  Venice, 
Queen  of  the  Sea. 


GIORGIONE 

As  we  look  back  upon  the  lives  of  the  great  painters 
we  can  see  how  each  one  added  some  new  knowledge 
to  the  history  of  Art,  and  unfolded  fresh  beauties  to 
the  eyes  of  the  world.  Very  gradually  all  this  was 
done,  as  a  bud  slowly  unfolds  its  petals  until  the  full- 
blown flower  shows  forth  its  perfect  beauty.  But  here 
and  there  among  the  painters  we  find  a  man  who 
stands  apart  from  the  rest,  one  who  takes  a  new  and 
almost  startling  way  of  his  own.  He  does  not 
gradually  add  new  truths  to  the  old  ones,  but  makes 
an  entirely  new  scheme  of  his  own.  Such  a  man 
was  Giorgione,  whose  story  we  tell  to-day. 

It  was  at  the  same  time  as  Leonardo  da  Vinci 
was  the  talk  of  the  Florentine  world,  that  another 
great  genius  was  at  work  in  Venice,  setting  his 
mark  high  above  all  who  had  gone  before.  Giorgio 
Barbarelli  was  born  at  Castel  Franco,  a  small  town 
not  far  from  Venice,  and  it  was  to  the  great  city  of  the 
sea  that  he  was  sent  as  soon  as  he  was  old  enough, 
there  to  be  trained  under  the  famous  Bellini.  He 
was  a  handsome  boy,  tall  and  well-built,  and  with 
such  a  royal  bearing  that  his  companions  at  once 
gave  him  the  name  of  Giorgione,  or  George  the  Great. 
And,  as  so  often  happened  in  those  days,  the  nick- 
name clung  to  him,  so  that  while  his  family  name 
is  almost  forgotten  he  is  still  known  as  Giorgione. 


154 


GIORGIONE  155 

There  was  much  of  the  poet  nature  about  Gior- 
gione,  and  his  love  of  music  was  intense.  He  com- 
posed his  own  songs  and  sang  them  to  his  own 
music  upon  the  lute,  and  indeed  it  seemed  as  if 
there  were  few  things  which  this  Great  George 
could  not  do.  But  it  was  his  painting  that  was 
most  wonderful,  for  his  painted  men  and  women 
seemed  alive  and  real,  and  he  caught  the  very  spirit 
of  music  in  his  pictures  and  there  held  it  fast. 

Giorgione  early  became  known  as  a  great  artist, 
and  when  he  was  quite  a  young  man  he  was  em- 
ployed by  the  city  of  Venice  to  fresco  the  outside 
walls  of  the  new  German  Exchange.  Wind  and 
rain  and  the  salt  sea  air  have  entirely  ruined  these 
frescoes  now,  and  there  are  but  few  of  Giorgione's 
pictures  left  to  us,  but  that  perhaps  makes  them  all 
the  more  precious  in  our  eyes. 

Even  his  drawings  are  rare,  and  the  one  you  see 
here  is  taken  from  a  bigger  sketch  in  the  Uffizzi 
Gallery  of  Florence.  It  shows  a  man  in  Venetian 
dress  helping  two  women  to  mount  one  of  the 
niches  of  a  marble  palace  in  order  to  see  some 
passing  show,  and  to  be  out  of  the  way  of  the  crowd. 

There  is  a  picture  now  in  the  Venice  Academy 
said  to  have  been  painted  by  Giorgione,  which  would 
interest  every  boy  and  girl  who  loves  old  stories. 
It  tells  the  tale  of  an  old  Venetian  legend,  almost 
forgotten  now,  but  which  used  to  be  told  with  bated 
breath,  and  was  believed  to  be  a  matter  of  history. 
The  story  is  this  : 

On  the  25th  of  February  1340  a  terrible  storm 
began  to  rage  around  Venice,  more  terrible  than 


156  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

any  that  had  ever  been  felt  before.  For  three  days 
the  wild  winds  swept  her  waters  and  shrieked  around 
her  palaces,  churning  up  the  sea  into  great  waves 
and  shaking  the  city  to  her  very  foundations. 
Lightning  and  thunder  never  ceased,  and  the  rain 
poured  down  in  a  great  sheet  of  grey  water,  until  it 
seemed  as  if  a  second  flood  had  come  to  visit  the 
world.  Slowly  but  surely  the  waters  rose  higher 
and  higher,  and  Venice  sunk  lower  and  lower,  and 
men  said  that  unless  the  storm  soon  ceased  the 
city  would  be  overwhelmed.  No  one  ventured 
out  on  the  canals,  and  only  an  old  fisherman  who 
happened  to  be  in  his  boat  was  swept  along  by  the 
canal  of  San  Marco,  and  managed  with  great  diffi- 
culty to  reach  the  steps.  Very  thankful  to  be  safe 
on  land  he  tied  his  boat  securely,  and  sat  down  to 
wait  until  the  storm  should  cease.  As  he  sat  there 
watching  the  lightning  and  hearing  nothing  but 
the  shriek  of  the  tempest,  some  one  touched  his 
shoulder  and  a  stranger's  voice  sounded  in  his  ear. 

*  Good  fisherman,'  it  said,  *  wilt  thou  row  me  over 
to  San  Giorgio  Maggiore  ?     I  will  pay  thee  well  if 
thou  wilt  go.' 

The  fisherman  looked  across  the  swirling  waters 
to  where  the  tall  bell-tower  upon  the  distant  island 
could  just  be  seen  through  the  driving  mist  and  rain. 

*  How  is  it  possible  to  row  across  to  San  Giorgio  ? ' 
he  asked.     '  My  little  boat  could  not  live  for  five 
minutes  in  those  raging  waters.' 

But  the  stranger  only  insisted  the  more,  and 
besought  him  to  do  his  best. 

So,  as  the  fisherman  was  a  hardy  old  man  and  had 


Drawing  by  GIORGK* 

A  nmii  iu  Venetian  dress  'lies 

Of  a  niarbl' 


GIORGIONE  157 

a  bold,  brave  soul,  he  loosed  the  boat  and  set  off  in 
all  the  storm.  But,  strangely  enough,  it  was  not  half 
so  bad  as  he  had  feared,  and  before  long  the  little 
boat  was  moored  safely  by  the  steps  of  San  Giorgio 
Maggiore. 

Here  the  stranger  left  the  boat,  but  bade  the 
fisherman  wait  his  return. 

Presently  he  came  back,  and  with  him  came  a 
young  man,  tall  and  strong,  bearing  himself  with  a 
knightly  grace. 

'  Row  now  to  San  Niccolo  da  Lido,'  commanded 
the  stranger. 

'  How  can  I  do  that  ? '  asked  the  fisherman  in 
great  fear.  For  San  Niccolo  was  far  distant,  and  he 
was  rowing  with  but  one  oar,  which  is  the  custom 
in  Venice. 

'  Row  boldly,  for  it  shall  be  possible  for  thee,  and 
thou  shalt  be  well  paid,'  replied  the  stranger  calmly. 

So,  seeing  it  was  the  will  of  God,  the  fisherman 
set  out  once  more,  and,  as  they  went,  the  waters 
spread  themselves  out  smoothly  before  them,  until 
they  reached  the  distant  San  Niccolo  da  Lido. 

Here  an  old  man  with  a  white  beard  was  awaiting 

o 

them,  and  when  he  too  had  entered  the  boat,  the 
fisherman  was  commanded  to  row  out  towards  the 
open  sea.  • 

Now  the  tempest  was  raging  more  fiercely  than 
ever,  and  lo !  across  the  wild  waste  of  foaming 
waters  an  enormous  black  galley  came  bearing  down 
upon  them.  So  fast  did  it  approach  that  it  seemed 
almost  to  fly  upon  the  wings  of  the  wind,  and  as  it 
came  near  the  fisherman  saw  that  it  was  manned  by 


158  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

fearful-looking  black  demons,  and  knew  that  they 
were  on  their  way  to  overwhelm  the  fair  city  of 
Venice. 

But  as  the  galley  came  near  the  little  boat,  the 
three  men  stood  upright,  and  with  outstretched 
arms  made  high  above  them  the  sign  of  the  cross, 
and  commanded  the  demons  to  depart  to  the  place 
from  whence  they  had  come. 

In  an  instant  the  sea  became  calm,  and  with  a 
horrible  shriek  the  demons  in  their  black  galley  dis- 
appeared from  view. 

Then  the  three  men  ordered  the  fisherman  to 
return  as  he  had  come.  So  the  old  man  was  landed 
at  San  Niccolo  da  Lido,  the  young  knight  at  San 
Giorgio  Maggiore,  and,  last  of  all,  the  stranger 
landed  at  San  Marco. 

Now  when  the  fisherman  found  that  his  work  was 
done,  he  thought  it  was  time  that  he  should  receive 
his  payment.  For,  although  he  had  seen  the  great 
miracle,  he  had  no  mind  to  forgo  his  proper  fare. 

'Thou  art  right,'  said  the  stranger,  when  the 
fisherman  made  his  demand,  *  and  thou  shalt  indeed 
be  well  paid.  Go  now  to  the  Doge  and  tell  him  all 
thou  hast  seen ;  how  Venice  would  have  been  de- 
stroyed by  the  demons  of  the  tempest,  had  it  not 
been  for  me  and  my  two  companions.  I  am  St. 
Mark,  the  protector  of  your  city ;  the  brave  young 
knight  is  St.  George,  and  the  old  man  whom  we 
took  in  last  is  St.  Nicholas.  Tell  the  Doge  that  I 
bade  him  pay  thee  well  for  thy  brave  service.' 

'  But,  and  if  I  tell  them  this  story,  how  will  they 
believe  that  I  speak  the  truth  ? '  asked  the  fisherman. 


GIORGIONE  159 

Then  St.  Mark  took  a  ring  off  his  finger,  and 
placed  it  in  the  fisherman's  rough  palm.  '  Thou 
shalt  show  them  this  ring  as  a  proof,'  he  said ;  '  and 
when  they  look  in  the  treasury  of  San  Marco,  they 
will  find  that  it  is  missing  from  there/ 

And  when  he  had  finished  saying  this,  St.  Mark 
disappeared. 

Then  the  next  day,  as  early  as  possible,  the  fisher- 
man went  to  the  Doge  and  told  his  marvellous  tale 
and  showed  the  saint's  ring.  At  first  no  one  could 
believe  the  wild  story,  but  when  they  sent  and 
searched  in  St.  Mark's  treasury,  lo  !  the  ring  was 
missing.  Then  they  knew  that  it  must  indeed  have 
been  St.  Mark  who  had  appeared  to  the  old  fisherman, 
and  had  saved  their  beloved  city  from  destruction. 

So  a  solemn  thanksgiving  service  was  sung  in  the 
great  church  of  San  Marco,  and  the  fisherman  re- 
ceived his  due  reward. 

He  was  no  longer  obliged  to  work  for  his  living, 
but  received  a  pension  from  the  rulers  of  the  city,  so 
that  he  lived  in  comfort  all  the  rest  of  his  days. 

In  the  picture  we  see  the  great  black  galley 
manned  by  the  demons,  sweeping  down  upon  the 
little  boat,  in  which  the  three  saints  stand  upright. 
And  not  only  are  the  demons  on  board  their  ship, 
but  some  are  riding  on  dolphins  and  curious-looking 
fish,  and  the  little  boat  is  entirely  surrounded  by  the 
terrible  crew. 

We  do  not  know  much  about  Giorgione's  life, 
but  we  do  know  that  it  was  a  short  and  sad  one, 
clouded  over  at  the  end  by  bitter  sorrow.  He  had 
loved  a  beautiful  Venetian  girl,  and  was  just  about 


160  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

to  marry  her  when  a  friend,  whom  he  also  loved, 
carried  her  off  and  left  him  robbed  of  love  and 
friendship.  Nothing  could  comfort  him  for  his  loss, 
the  light  seemed  to  have  faded  from  his  life,  and 
soon  life  itself  began  to  wane.  A  very  little  while 
after  and  he  closed  his  eyes  upon  all  the  beauty  and 
promise  which  had  once  filled  his  world.  But 
though  we  have  so  few  of  his  pictures,  those  few 
alone  are  enough  to  show  that  it  was  more  than  an 
idle  jest  which  made  his  companions  give  him  the 
nickname  of  George  the  Great. 


TITIAN 

WE  have  seen  how  most  of  the  great  painters  loved 
to  paint  into  their  pictures  those  scenes  which  they 
had  known  when  they  were  boys,  and  which  to  the 
end  of  their  lives  they  remembered  clearly  and 
vividly.  Giotto  never  forgets  the  look  of  his  sheep 
on  the  bare  hillside  of  Vespignano,  Fra  Angelico 
paints  his  heavenly  pictures  with  the  colours  of 
spring  flowers  found  on  the  slopes  of  Fiesole,  Peru- 
gino  delights  in  the  wide  spaciousness  of  the 
Umbrian  plains  with  the  winding  river  and  solitary 
cypresses. 

So  when  we  come  to  the  great  Venetian  painter 
Titian  we  look  first  with  interest  to  see  in  what 
manner  of  a  country  he  was  born,  and  what  were 
the  pictures  which  Nature  mirrored  in  his  mind 
when  he  was  still  a  boy.' 

At  the  foot  of  the  Alps,  three  days'  journey  from 
Venice,  lies  the  little  town  of  Cadore  on  the  Pieve, 
and  here  it  was  that  Titian  was  born.  On  every  side 
rise  great  masses  of  rugged  mountains  towering  up 
to  the  sky,  with  jagged  peaks  and  curious  fantastic 
shapes.  Clouds  float  around  their  summits,  and  the 
mist  will  often  wrap  them  in  gloom  and  give  them 
a  strange  and  awesome  look.  At  the  foot  of  the 
craggy  pass  the  mountain-torrent  of  the  Pieve  roars 

L 


162  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

and  tumbles  on  its  way.  Far-reaching  forests  of 
trees,  with  weather-beaten  gnarled  old  trunks,  stand 
firm  against  the  mountain  storms.  Beneath  their 
wide-spreading  boughs  there  is  a  gloom  almost  of 
twilight,  showing  peeps  here  and  there  of  deep 
purple  distances  beyond. 

Small  wonder  it  was  that  Titian  should  love  to 
paint  mountains,  and  that  he  should  be  the  first  to 
paint  a  purely  landscape  picture.  He  loved  those 
strange  solemn  mountains  and  the  wild  country 
round,  the  deep  gloom  of  the  woods  and  the  purple 
of  the  distance  beyond. 

The  boy's  father,  Gregorio  Vecelli,  was  one  of  the 
nobles  of  Cadore,  but  the  family  was  not  rich,  and 
when  Titian  was  ten  years  old  he  was  sent  to  an 
uncle  in  Venice  to  be  taught  some  trade.  He  had 
always  been  fond  of  painting,  and  it  is  said  that 
when  he  was  a  very  little  boy  he  was  found  trying 
to  paint  a  picture  with  the  juices  of  flowers.  His 
uncle,  seeing  that  the  boy  had  some  talent,  placed 
him  in  the  studio  of  Giovanni  Bellini. 

But  though  Titian  learned  much  from  Bellini,  it 
was  not  until  he  first  saw  Giorgione's  work  that 
he  dreamed  of  what  it  was  possible  to  do  with 
colour.  Thenceforward  he  began  to  paint  with  that 
marvellous  richness  of  colouring  which  has  made  his 
name  famous  all  over  the  world. 

At  first  young  Titian  worked  with  Giorgione,  and 
together  they  began  to  fresco  the  walls  of  the 
Exchange  above  the  Rialto  bridge.  But  by  and  by 
Giorgione  grew  jealous.  Titian's  work  was  praised 
too  highly ;  it  was  even  thought  to  be  the  better  of 


TITIAN  163 

the  two.  So  they  parted  company,  for  Giorgione 
would  work  with  him  no  more. 

Venice  soon  began  to  awake  to  the  fact  that 
in  Titian  she  had  another  great  painter  who  was 
likely  to  bring  fame  and  honour  to  the  fair  city. 
He  was  invited  to  finish  the  frescoes  in  the  Grand 
Council-chamber  which  Bellini  had  begun,  and  to 
paint  the  portraits  of  the  Doges,  her  rulers. 

These  portraits  which  Titian  painted  were  so 
much  admired  that  all  the  great  princes  and  nobles 
desired  to  have  themselves  painted  by  the  Venetian 
artist.  The  Emperor  Charles  v.  himself  when  he 
stopped  at  Bologna  sent  to  Venice  to  fetch  Titian, 
and  so  delighted  was  he  with  his  work  that  he  made 
the  painter  a  knight  with  a  pension  of  two  hundred 
crowns. 

Fame  and  wealth  awaited  Titian  wherever  he 
went,  and  before  long  he  was  invited  to  Rome  that 
he  might  paint  the  portrait  of  the  Pope.  There 
it  was  that  he  met  Michelangelo,  and  that  great 
master  looked  with  much  interest  at  the  work  of  the 
Venetian  artist  and  praised  it  highly,  for  the  colour- 
ing was  such  as  he  had  never  seen  equalled  before. 

*  It  is  most  beautiful,'  he  said  afterwards  to  a 
friend ;  *  but  it  is  a  pity  that  in  Venice  they  do  not 
teach  men  how  to  draw  as  well  as  how  to  colour. 
If  this  Titian  drew  as  well  as  he  painted,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  surpass  him.' 

But  ordinary  eyes  can  find  little  fault  with 
Titian's  drawing,  and  his  portraits  are  thought  to  be 
the  most  wonderful  that  ever  were  painted.  The 
golden  glow  of  Venice  is  cast  like  a  magic  spell 


164  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

over  his  pictures,  and  in  him  the  great  Venetian 
school  of  colouring  reaches  its  height. 

Besides  painting  portraits,  Titian  painted  many 
other  pictures  which  are  among  the  world's  master- 
pieces. 

He  must  have  had  a  special  love  for  children, 
this  famous  old  Venetian  painter.  We  can  tell  by 
his  pictures  how  well  he  understood  them  and  how 
he  loved  to  paint  them.  He  would  learn  much  by 
watching  his  own  little  daughter  Lavinia  as  she 
played  about  the  old  house  in  Venice.  His  wife 
had  died,  and  his  eldest  son  was  only  a  grief  and 
disappointment  to  his  father,  but  the  little  daughter 
was  the  light  of  his  eyes. 

We  seem  to  catch  a  glimpse  of  her  face  in  his 
famous  picture  of  the  little  Virgin  going  up  the 
steps  to  the  temple.  The  little  maid  is  all  alone, 
for  she  has  left  her  companions  behind,  and  the 
crowd  stands  watching  her  from  below,  while  the 
high  priest  waits  for  her  above.  One  hand  is 
stretched  out,  and  with  the  other  she  lifts  her  dress 
as  she  climbs  up  the  marble  steps.  She  looks  a  very 
real  child  with  her  long  plait  of  golden  hair  and 
serious  little  face,  and  we  cannot  help  thinking  that 
the  painter's  own  little  daughter  must  have  been  in 
his  mind  when  he  painted  the  little  Virgin. 

Titian  lived  to  be  a  very  old  man,  almost  a 
hundred  years  old,  and  up  to  the  last  he  was  always 
seen  with  the  brush  in  his  hand,  painting  some  new 
picture.  So,  when  he  passed  away,  he  left  behind 
a  rich  store  of  beauty,  which  not  only  decked  the 
walls  of  his  beloved  Venice,  but  made  the  whole 
world  richer  and  more  beautiful. 


THE    LITTLE    VIRGIN.      By    TITIAN 
"The  little  maid  is  all  alone" 


TINTORETTO 

IT  was  between  four  and  five  hundred  years  ago  that 
Venice  sat  most  proudly  on  her  throne  as  Queen  of 
the  Sea.  She  had  the  greatest  fleet  in  all  the  Medi- 
terranean. She  bought  and  sold  more  than  any  other 
nation.  She  had  withstood  the  shock  of  battle  and 
conquered  all  her  foes,  and  now  she  had  time  to  deck 
herself  with  all  the  beauty  which  art  and  wealth  could 
produce. 

The  merchants  of  Venice  sailed  to  every  port  and 
carried  with  them  wonderful  shiploads  of  goods,  for 
which  their  city  was  famous — silks,  velvets,  lace,  and 
rich  brocades.  The  secret  of  the  marvellous  Tyrian 
dyes  had  been  discovered  by  her  people,  and  there 
were  many  dyers  in  Venice  who  were  specially 
famous  for  the  purple  dye  of  Tyre,  which  was 
thought  to  be  the  most  beautiful  in  all  the  world. 
Then  too  they  had  learned  the  art  of  blowing  glass 
into  fairy-like  forms,  as  delicate  and  light  as  a  bubble, 
catching  in  it  every  shade  of  colour,  and  twisting  it 
into  a  hundred  exquisite  shapes.  Truly  there  had 
never  been  a  richer  or  more  beautiful  city  than  this 
Queen  of  the  Sea. 

It  was  just  when  the  glory  of  Venice  was  at  its 
highest  that  Art  too  reached  its  height,  and  Giorgione 


166 


166  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

and  Titian  began  to  paint  the  walls  of  her  palaces 
and  the  altarpieces  of  her  churches. 

In  the  very  centre  of  the  city  where  the  poorer 
Venetians  had  their  houses,  there  lived  about  this 
time  a  man  called  Battista  Robusti  who  was  a  dyer, 
or  '  tintore,'  as  he  is  called  in  Italy.  It  was  his  little 
son  Jacopo  who  afterwards  became  such  a  famous 
artist.  His  grand  -  sounding  name  *  Tintoretto' 
means  nothing  but  *  the  little  dyer,'  and  it  was  given 
to  him  because  of  his  father's  trade. 

Tintoretto  must  have  been  brought  up  in  the 
midst  of  gorgeous  colours.  Not  only  did  he  see  the 
wonderful  changing  tints  of  the  outside  world,  but 
in  his  father's  workshop  he  must  often  have  watched 
the  rich  Venetian  stuffs  lifted  from  the  dye  vats, 
heavy  with  the  crimson  and  purple  shades  for  which 
Venice  was  famous.  Perhaps  all  this  glowing  colour 
wearied  his  young  eyes,  for  when  he  grew  to  be  a 
man  his  pictures  show  that  he  loved  solemn  and  dark 
tones,  though  he  could  also  paint  the  most  brilliant 
colours  when  he  chose. 

Of  course,  the  boy  Tintoretto  began  by  painting 
the  walls  of  his  father's  house,  as  soon  as  he  was  old 
enough  to  learn  the  use  of  dyes  and  paints.  Even 
if  he  had  not  had  in  him  the  artist  soul,  he  could 
scarcely  have  resisted  the  temptation  to  spread  those 
lovely  colours  on  the  smooth  white  walls.  Any 
child  would  have  done  the  same,  but  Tintoretto's 
mischievous  fingers  already  showed  signs  of  talent, 
and  his  father,  instead  of  scolding  him  for  wasting 
colours  and  spoiling  the  walls,  encouraged  him  to  go 
on  with  his  pictures. 


TINTORETTO  167 

As  the  boy  grew  older,  his  great  delight  was  to 
wander  about  the  city  and  watch  the  men  at  work 
building  new  palaces.  But  especially  did  he  linger 
near  those  walls  which  Titian  and  Giorgione  were 
covering  with  their  wonderful  frescoes.  High  on  the 
scaffolding  he  would  see  the  painters  at  work,  and 
as  he  watched  the  boy  would  build  castles  in  the  air, 
and  dream  dreams  of  a  time  when  he  too  would  be  a 
master-painter,  and  be  bidden  by  Venice  to  decorate 
her  walls. 

To  Tintoretto's  mind  Titian  was  the  greatest  man 
in  all  the  world,  and  to  be  taught  by  him  the  greatest 
honour  that  heart  could  wish.  So  it  was  perhaps  the 
happiest  day  in  all  his  life  when  his  father  decided  to 
take  him  to  Titian's  studio  and  ask  the  master  to 
receive  him  as  a  pupil. 

But  the  happiness  lasted  but  a  very  short  time. 
Titian  did  not  approve  of  the  boy's  work,  and  re- 
fused to  keep  him  in  the  studio ;  so  poor,  disappointed 
Tintoretto  went  home  again,  and  felt  as  if  all  sun- 
shine and  hope  had  gone  for  ever  from  his  life.  It 
was  a  bitter  disappointment  to  his  father  and  mother 
too,  for  they  had  set  their  hearts  on  the  boy  becom- 
ing an  artist.  But  in  spite  of  all  this,  Tintoretto  did 
not  lose  heart  or  give  up  his  dreams.  He  worked 
on  by  himself  in  his  own  way,  and  Titian's  paintings 
taught  him  many  things  even  though  the  master 
himself  refused  to  help  him.  Then  too  he  saw  some 
work  of  the  great  Michelangelo,  and  learned  many 
a  lesson  from  that.  Thenceforward  his  highest  ideal 
was  always  'the  drawing  of  Michelangelo  and  the 
colour  of  Titian. 


168  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

The  young  artist  lived  in  a  poor,  bare  room,  and 
most  of  his  money  went  in  the  buying  of  little  pieces 
of  old  sculpture  or  casts.  He  had  a  very  curious 
way  of  working  the  designs  for  his  pictures.  Instead 
of  drawing  many  sketches,  he  made  little  wax  models 
of  figures  and  arranged  them  inside  a  cardboard  or 
wooden  box  in  which  there  was  a  hole  to  admit 
a  lighted  candle.  So,  besides  the  grouping  of  the 
figures,  he  could  also  arrange  the  light  and  shade. 

But,  though  he  worked  hard,  fame  was  long  in 
coming  to  Tintoretto.  People  did  not  understand 
his  way  of  painting.  It  was  not  after  the  manner 
of  any  of  the  great  artists,  and  they  were  rather 
afraid  of  his  bold,  furious-looking  work. 

Nevertheless  Tintoretto  worked  steadily  on,  always 
hoping,  and  whenever  there  was  a  chance  of  doing 
any  work,  even  without  receiving  payment  for  it,  he 
seized  it  eagerly. 

It  happened  just  then  that  the  young  Venetian 
artists  had  agreed  to  have  a  show  of  their  paintings, 
and  had  hired  a  room  for  the  exhibition  in  the  Mer- 
ceria,  the  busiest  part  of  Venice. 

Tintoretto  was  very  glad  of  the  chance  of  showing 
his  work,  so  he  sent  in  a  portrait  of  himself  and  also 
one  of  his  brother.  As  soon  as  these  pictures  were 
seen  people  began  to  take  more  notice  of  the  clever 
young  painter,  and  even  Titian  allowed  that  his  work 
was  good.  His  portraits  were  always  fresh  and  life- 
like, and  he  drew  with  a  bold  strong  touch,  as  you 
will  see  if  you  look  at  the  drawing  I  have  shown  you 
— the  head  of  a  Venetian  boy,  such  as  Tintoretto 
met  daily  among  the  fisher-folk  of  Venice. 


o 

H 
H 
H 
« 
O 


fi 


3) 

J3 

n 


S 

5     o 

r,  *J 

H  *i 

>,     2 

f 


D 
.2 

a 
S 

'*2 

s 


•o 


__     ,      p,         p.        C  f\  f  I  '  I  i~i  A 

T  JuUc  D     l-OUNUA  I  lUNc 


TINTORETTO  169 

From  that  time  Fortune  began  to  smile  on  Tintor- 
etto. Little  by  little  work  began  to  come  in.  He 
was  asked  to  paint  altarpieces  for  the  churches,  and 
even  at  last,  when  his  name  became  famous,  he  was 
invited  to  work  upon  the  walls  of  the  Ducal  Palace, 
the  highest  honour  which  a  Venetian  painter  could 
hope  to  win. 

The  days  of  the  poor,  bare  studio,  and  lonely,  sad 
life  were  ended  now.  Tintoretto  had  no  longer  to 
struggle  with  poverty  and  neglect.  His  house  was  a 
beautiful  palace  looking  over  the  lagoon  towards 
Murano,  and  he  had  married  the  daughter  of  a 
Venetian  noble,  and  lived  a  happy,  contented  life. 
Children's  voices  made  gay  music  in  his  home,  and 
the  pattering  of  little  feet  broke  the  silence  of  his 
studio.  Fame  had  come  to  him  too.  His  work 
might  be  strange  but  it  was  very  wonderful,  and 
Venice  was  proud  of  her  new  painter.  His  great 
stormy  pictures  had  earned  for  him  the  name  of  *  the 
furious  painter,'  and  the  world  began  to  acknowledge 
his  greatness. 

But  the  real  sunshine  of  his  life  was  his  little 
daughter  Marietta.  As  soon  as  she  learned  to  walk 
she  found  her  way  to  her  father's  studio,  and  until 
she  was  fifteen  years  old  she  was  always  with  him 
and  helped  him  as  if  she  had  been  one  of  his  pupils. 
She  was  dressed  too  as  a  boy,  and  visitors  to  the 
studio  never  guessed  that  the  clever,  handsome  boy 
was  really  the  painter's  daughter. 

There  were  many  great  schools  in  Venice  at  that 
time,  and  there  was  much  work  to  be  done  in  decorat- 
ing their  walls  with  paintings.  A  school  was  not  really 


170  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

a  place  of  education,  but  a  society  of  people  who 
joined  themselves  together  in  charity  to  nurse  the 
sick,  bury  the  dead,  and  release  any  prisoners  who 
had  been  taken  captive.  One  of  the  greatest  of  the 
schools  was  the  '  Scuola  de  San  Rocco,'  and  this  was 
given  into  the  hands  of  Tintoretto,  who  covered  the 
walls  with  his  paintings,  leaving  but  little  room  for 
other  artists. 

But  it  is  in  the  Ducal  Palace  that  the  master's 
most  famous  work  is  seen.  There,  covering  the 
entire  side  of  the  great  hall,  hangs  his  '  Paradiso,'  the 
largest  oil  painting  in  the  world. 

At  first  it  seems  but  a  gloomy  picture  of  Paradise. 
It  is  so  vast,  and  such  hundreds  of  figures  are  crowded 
together,  and  the  colour  is  dark  and  sombre.  There 
is  none  of  that  swinging  of  golden  censers  by  white- 
robed  angels,  none  of  the  pure  glad  colouring  of 
spring  flowers  which  makes  us  love  the  Paradise  of 
Fra  Angelico. 

But  if  we  stand  long  enough  before  it  a  great 
awe  steals  over  us,  and  we  forget  to  look  for  bright 
colours  and  gentle  angel  faces,  for  the  figures  surging 
upwards  are  very  real  and  human,  and  the  Paradise 
into  which  we  gaze  seems  to  reveal  to  our  eyes  the 
very  place  where  we  ourselves  shall  stand  one  day. 

At  the  time  when  Tintoretto  was  painting  his 
'Paradiso,'  his  little  daughter  Marietta  had  grown 
to  be  a  woman,  and  her  painting  too  had  become 
famous.  She  was  invited  to  the  courts  of  Germany 
and  Spain  to  paint  the  portraits  of  the  King  and 
Emperor,  but  she  refused  to  leave  Venice  and  her 
beloved  father.  Even  when  she  married  Mario, 


TINTORETTO  171 

the  jeweller,  she  did  not  go  far  from  home,  and 
Tintoretto  grew  every  year  fonder  and  prouder  of 
his  clever  and  beautiful  daughter.  Not  only  could 
she  paint,  but  she  played  and  sang  most  wonder- 
fully, and  became  a  great  favourite  among  the 
music-loving  Venetians. 

But  this  happiness  soon  came  to  an  end,  for  Mari- 
etta died  suddenly  in  the  midst  of  her  happy  life. 

Nothing  could  comfort  Tintoretto  for  the  loss  of 
his  daughter.  She  was  buried  in  the  church  of  Santa 
Maria  dell'  Orto,  and  there  he  ordered  another  place 
to  be  prepared  that  he  might  be  buried  at  her  side. 
It  seemed,  indeed,  as  if  he  could  not  live  without  her, 
for  it  was  not  long  before  he  passed  away.  The  last 
great  stormy  picture  of  'the  furious  painter'  was 
finished,  and  all  Venice  mourned  as  they  laid  him  to 
rest  beside  the  daughter  he  had  loved  so  well. 


PAUL  VERONESE 

IT  was  in  the  city  of  Verona  that  Paul  Cagliari,  the 
last  of  the  great  painters  of  the  Venetian  school,  was 
born.  The  name  of  that  old  city  of  the  Veneto 
makes  us  think  at  once  of  moonlight  nights  and 
fair  Juliet  gazing  from  her  balcony  as  she  bids  fare- 
well to  her  dear  Romeo.  For  it  was  here  that  the  two 
lovers  lived  their  short  lives  which  ended  so  sadly. 

But  Verona  has  other  titles  to  fame  besides  being 
the  scene  of  Shakespeare's  story,  and  one  of  her 
proudest  boasts  is  that  she  gave  her  name  to  the 
great  Venetian  artist  Paolo  Veronese,  or  Paul  of 
Verona,  as  we  would  say  in  English. 

There  were  many  artists  in  Verona  when  Paolo 
was  a  boy.  His  own  father  was  a  sculptor  and  his 
uncle  a  famous  painter,  so  the  child  was  encouraged 
to  begin  work  early.  As  soon  as  he  showed  that 
he  had  a  talent  for  painting,  he  was  sent  to  his 
uncle's  studio  to  be  taught  his  first  lessons  in 
drawing. 

Verona  was  not  very  far  off  from  Venice,  and 
Paolo  was  never  tired  of  listening  to  the  tales  told 
of  that  beautiful  Queen  of  the  Sea.  He  loved  to 
try  and  picture  her  magnificence,  her  marble  palaces 
overlaid  with  gold,  her  richly-dressed  nobles,  and, 
above  all,  the  wonder  of  those  pictures  which 


PAUL  VERONESE  173 

decked  her  walls.  The  very  names  of  Giorgione 
and  Titian  sounded  like  magic  in  his  ears.  They 
seemed  to  open  out  before  him  a  wonderful  new 
Paradise,  where  stately  men  and  women  clad  in  the 
richest  robes  moved  about  in  a  world  of  glowing 
colour. 

At  last  the  day  came  when  he  was  to  see  the  city 
of  his  dreams,  and  enter  into  that  magic  world  of 
Art.  What  delight  it  was  to  study  those  pictures 
hour  by  hour,  and  learn  the  secrets  of  the  great 
masters.  It  was  the  best  teaching  that  heart  could 
desire. 

No  one  in  Venice  took  much  notice  of  the  quiet, 
hard-working  young  painter,  and  he  worked  on 
steadily  by  himself  for  some  years.  But  at  last  his 
chance  came,  and  he  was  commissioned  to  paint  the 
ceiling  of  the  church  of  St.  Sebastian  ;  and  when  this 
was  finished  Venice  recognised  his  genius,  and  saw 
that  here  was  another  of  her  sons  whom  she  must 
delight  to  honour. 

These  great  pictures  of  Veronese  were  just  the 
kind  of  work  to  charm  the  rich  Venetians,  those 
merchant  princes  who  delighted  in  costly  magnifi- 
cence. Never  before  had  any  painter  pictured  such 
royal  scenes  of  grandeur.  There  were  banqueting 
halls  with  marble  balustrades  just  like  their  own 
Venetian  palaces.  The  guests  that  thronged  these 
halls  were  courtly  gentlemen  and  high-born  ladies 
arrayed  in  rich  brocades  and  dazzling  jewels.  Men- 
servants  and  maidservants,  costly  ornaments  and 
golden  dishes  were  there,  everything  that  heart 
could  desire. 


174  KNIGHTS  OF  ART 

True,  there  was  not  much  room  for  religious  feel- 
ing amid  all  this  grandeur,  although  the  painter 
would  call  the  pictures  by  some  Bible  name  and 
would  paint  in  the  figure  of  our  Lord,  or  the  Blessed 
Virgin,  among  the  gay  crowd.  But  no  one  stopped 
to  think  about  religion,  and  what  cared  they  if  the 
guests  at  the  *  Marriage  Feast  of  Cana '  were  dressed 
in  the  rich  robes  of  Venetian  nobles,  and  all  was  as 
different  as  possible  from  the  simple  wedding-feast 
where  Christ  worked  his  first  miracle. 

So  the  fame  of  Paolo  Veronese  grew  greater  and 
greater,  and  he  painted  more  and  more  gorgeous 
pictures.  But  here  and  there  we  find  a  simpler  and 
more  charming  piece  of  his  work,  as  when  he 
painted  the  little  St.  John  with  the  skin  thrown 
over  his  bare  shoulder  and  the  cross  in  his  hand. 
He  is  such  a  really  childlike  figure  as  he  stands 
looking  upward  and  rests  his  little  hand  confidingly 
on  the  worn  and  wounded  palm  of  St.  Francis,  who 
stands  beside  him. 

Although  the  Venetian  nobles  found  nothing 
wanting  in  the  splendid  pictures  which  Veronese 
painted,  the  Church  at  last  began  to  have  doubts 
as  to  whether  they  were  fit  as  religious  subjects  to 
adorn  her  walls.  The  Holy  Office  considered  the 
question,  and  Veronese  was  ordered  to  appear  before 
the  council. 

Was  it,  indeed,  fit  that  court  jesters,  little  negro 
boys,  and  even  cats  and  pet  dogs  should  appear  in 
pictures  which  were  to  decorate  the  walls  of  a 
church  ?  Veronese  answered  gravely  that  it  was 
the  effect  of  the  picture  that  mattered,  and  that  the 


THE  LITTLE  S  JOHN  FROM  THE  MADONNA  ENTHRONED 
By  VERONESE 

'The  little  S.  John  with  the  skin  thrown  over  his  bare  shoulder  find 
the  cross  in  his  hand  " 


NS. 


PAUL  VERONESE  175 

* 

details  need  not  be  thought  of.  So  the  complaint 
was  dismissed. 

These  pictures  of  Paolo  Veronese  were  really 
great  pieces  of  decoration,  very  wonderful  in  their 
.  way,  but  showing  already  that  Art  was  sinking  lower 
instead  of  rising  higher. 

If  the  spirits  of  the  old  masters  could  have  re- 
turned to  ga2;e  upon  this  new  work,  what  would 
their  feelings  have  been  ?  How  the  simple  Giotto 
would  have  shaken  his  head  over  this  wealth  of 
ornament  which  meant  so  little,  even  while  he 
marvelled  at  the  clever  work.  How  sorrowfully 
would  Fra  Angelieo  have  turned  away  from  this 
perfection  of  worldly  vanity,  and  sighed  to  think 
that  the  art  of  painting  was  no  longer  a  golden 
chain  to  link  men's  souls  to  Heaven.  Even  the 
merry-hearted  monk  Fra  Filippo  Lippi  would  scarce 
Rave  approved  of  all  this  gorgeous  company. 

Art  had  indeed  shaken  off  the  binding  rules  of 
old  tradition,  and  Veronese  was  free  to  follow  his 
own  magnificent  fancy.  But  who  can  say  if  that 
."freedom  was  indeed  a  gain  ?  And  it  is  with  a  sigh  that 
we  close  the  record  of  Italian  Art  and  turn  our  eyes, 
wearied  with  all  its  splendour  and  the  glare  of  the 
noonday  sun,  back  to  the  early  dawn,  when  the 
soul  of  the  painter  looked  through  his  pictures,  and 
taught  us  the  simple  lesson  that  work  done  for  the 
glory  of  God  was  greater  than  that  done  for  the 
praise  of  men. 


>     »     i»J 


• 


Printed  by  T.  and  A.  CONSTABLE,  Printers  to  His  Majesty 
at  the  Edinburgh  University  Press